Samsung Centralized Workflow Solution Scx 6545N Users Manual SCX6545N Guide_EN

SCX-6545N to the manual 579ba052-9e53-4763-b9ec-50b3ed7b3a73

2015-01-23

: Samsung Samsung-Centralized-Workflow-Solution-Scx-6545N-Users-Manual-275197 samsung-centralized-workflow-solution-scx-6545n-users-manual-275197 samsung pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 190 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

SCX-6545N Series
Multi Functional Printer
User’s Guide
imagine the possibilities
Thank you for purchasing a Samsung product.
1
features of your new laser MFP
Thank you for purchasing this Samsung multifunctional product. Your machine provides printing, copying, scanning, and faxing
functions.
With the machine, you can:
SPECIAL FEATURES
Print with excellent quality and speed
• You can print with a resolution of up to 1200 dpi Effective
output. See Software section.
• Your machine prints A4-sized paper at up to 43 ppm and
letter-sized paper at up to 45 ppm.
• For duplex printing, your machine prints A4-sized paper at
up to 38 ppm and letter-sized paper at up to 40 ppm.
Handle many different types of printable material
• The multi-purpose tray supports letterhead, envelopes,
labels, transparencies, custom-sized media, postcards, and
heavy paper. The multi-purpose tray holds up to 100 sheets
of plain paper.
• The 520 sheet tray 1 and 520 sheet optional tray support
plain paper in various sizes.
• The 2,100 sheet optional high tray support plain paper in
various sizes.
Create professional documents
• Print Watermarks. You can customize your documents with
words, such as “Confidential”. See Software section.
• Print Posters. The text and pictures of each page of your
document are magnified and printed across the sheet of
paper and can then be taped together to form a poster. See
Software section.
• You can use preprinted forms and letterhead with plain
paper. See Software section.
Save time and money
• To save paper, you can print multiple pages on one single
sheet of paper.
• This machine automatically conserves electricity by
substantially reducing power consumption when not in use.
• To save paper, you can print on both sides of the paper
(double-sided printing). See Software section.
Expand your machine’s capacity
• Your machine has an extra memory slot to expand their
memory. (See "Installing a memory DIMM" on page 123.)
• A Network interface enables network printing. Your
machine comes with a built-in network interface, 10/100/
1000 Base TX.
Some features are optional. Please check the
specifications sections. (See "Specifications" on
page 126.)
• Zoran IPS Emulation* compatible with PostScript 3
Emulation* (PS) enables PS printing.
.
Print in various environments
• You can print with various operating system such as
Windows, Linux and Macintosh systems.
• Your machine is equipped with a USB interface and a
network interface.
Copy originals in several formats
• You can create a booklet using sequential 2-sided
document production.
• There are special functions to erase punch holes, staple
marks and newspaper background.
• The print quality and image size may be adjusted and
enhanced at the same time.
Scan the originals and send it right away
• Quickly scan and send files to multiple destinations using,
E-mail, SMB, FTP or Networks scanning.
• Simply use the touch screen keyboard to enter email
addresses and send the scanned image immediately.
• Scan in color and use the precise compressions of JPEG,
TIFF and PDF formats.
Set a specific time to transmit a Fax (Optional)
• You can specify a certain time to transmit the fax and also
send the fax to several stored destinations.
• After the transmission, the machine may print out the fax
reports according to the setting.
Use USB memory devices
If you have a USB memory device, you can use it in various
ways with your machine.
• You can scan documents and save them to the device.
• You can directly print data stored to the device.
• You can back up data and restore backup files to the
machine’s memory.
IPv6
This machine supports IPv6.
* Zoran IPS Emulation compatible with PostScript 3
© Copyright 1995-2005, Zoran Corporation. All rights reserved.
Zoran, the Zoran logo, IPS/PS3, and OneImage are
trademarks of Zoran Corporation.
* 136PS3 fonts
Contains UFST and MicroType from Monotype Imaging Inc.
2
FEATURES BY MODELS
The machine is designed to support all of your document needs – from printing and copying, to more advanced networking solutions for your business.
Basic features of this machine include;
( : Included, O: Optional, Blank: Not Available)
ABOUT THIS USER’S GUIDE
This user’s guide provides information about basic understanding of the machine as well as detailed explanation on each step during the actual usage. Both novice
users and professional users can refer to this guide for installing and using the machine.
Some terms in this guide are used interchangeably, as below:
• Document is synonymous with original.
• Paper is synonymous with media, or print media.
The following table offers the conventions of this guide.
FEATURES SCX-6545N
USB 2.0
USB Memory
DADF (Duplex Automatic Document Feeder)
Hard Disk
Network Interface Enthernet 10/100/1000 Base TX wired LAN
Duplex (2-sided) printing
FAX O
Stacker & Stapler (Finisher) O
Stand O
CONVENTION DESCRIPTION EXAMPLE
Bold Used for texts on the display or actual prints on the machine. Start
Note Used to provide additional information or detailed specification of the machine
function and feature. .The date format may differ from
country to country
Caution Used to give users information to protect the machine from possible mechanical
damage or malfunction. Do not touch the green underside of
the print cartridge.
>Used to show the steps of selecting or pressing items in order.
The example means; press Copy from the Main screen, press the Advanced tab,
and then press Clone Copy.
Copy > the Advanced tab > Clone Copy
Footnote Used to provide more detailed information on certain words or a phrase. a. pages per minute
(See page 1 for more
information) Used to guide users to the reference page for the additional detailed information. (See page1 for more information)
3
FINDING MORE INFORMATION
You can find information for setting up and using your machine from the following resources, either as a print-out or onscreen.
Quick Install Guide Provides information on setting up your machine and this requires that you follow the instructions in the guide to prepare the machine.
Online User’s Guide Provides you with step-by-step instructions for using your machine’s full features, and contains information for maintaining your
machine, troubleshooting, and installing accessories.
This user’s guide also contains Software section to provide you with information on how to print documents with your machine in
various operating systems, and how to use the included software utilities.
Network Website You can set the network environment from your computer using network-managing programs, such as
SetIP
,
SyncThru™ Web Admin
Service
, AnyWeb Print etc.
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service
will be convenient for network administrators who need to manage many
machines simultaneously. AnyWeb Print helps personal users to screen-capture the website screen in Windows Internet Explorer
easily. You can download the
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service
or AnyWeb Print on http://solution.samsungprinter.com.
SetIP
program
is provided in the software CD.
Printer Driver Help Provides you with help information on printer driver properties and instructions for setting up the properties for printing. To access a
printer driver help screen, click
Help
from the printer properties dialog box.
Samsung website If you have Internet access, you can get help, support, printer drivers, manuals, and order information from the Samsung website,
www.samsungprinter.com.
4
safety information
IMPORTANT SAFETY SYMBOLS AND PRECAUTIONS
What the icons and signs in this user manual mean:
These warning signs are here to prevent injury to you and others.
Please follow them explicitly.
After reading this section, keep it in a safe place for future reference.
WARNING
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in severe personal injury or death.
CAUTION
Hazards or unsafe practices that may result in minor personal injury or property damage.
CAUTION
To reduce the risk of fire, explosion, electric shock, or personal injury when using your laser MFP, follow these basic safety
precautions:
Do NOT attempt.
Do NOT disassemble.YTU
Do NOT touch.
Follow directions explicitly.
Unplug the power plug from the wall socket.
Make sure the MFP is grounded to prevent electric shock.
Call the service center for help.
1. Read and understand all instructions.
2. Use common sense whenever operating electrical appliances.
3. Follow all warnings and instructions marked on the machine and in the literature accompanying the machine.
4. If an operating instruction appears to conflict with safety information, heed the safety information. You may have misunderstood the
operating instruction. If you cannot resolve the conflict, contact your sales or service representative for assistance.
5. Unplug the machine from the AC wall socket and/or telephone jack before cleaning. Do not use liquid or aerosol cleaners. Use only
a damp cloth for cleaning.
6. Do not place the machine on an unstable cart, stand or table. It may fall, causing serious damage.
7. Your machine should never be placed on, near or over a radiator, heater, air conditioner or ventilation duct.
8. Do not allow anything to rest on the power. Do not locate your machine where the cords will be abused by persons walking on them.
9. Do not overload wall outlets and extension cords. This can diminish performance, and may result in the risk of fire or electric shock.
10. Do not allow pets to chew on the AC power, telephone or PC interface cords.
11. Never push objects of any kind into the machine through case or cabinet openings. They may touch dangerous voltage points,
creating a risk of fire or shock. Never spill liquid of any kind onto or into the machine.
12. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not disassemble the machine. Take it to a qualified service technician when repair work is
required. Opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly could cause
electric shock when the unit is subsequently used.
5
LASER SAFETY STATEMENT
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, chapter 1 Subchapter J for Class I(1) laser products, and
elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements of IEC 825.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human access to
laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance or prescribed service condition.
WARNING
Never operate or service the printer with the protective cover removed from Laser/Scanner assembly. The reflected beam, although invisible,
can damage your eyes.
When using this product, these basic safety precautions should always be followed to reduce risk of fire, electric shock, and injury to persons:
13. Unplug the machine from the telephone jack, PC and AC wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the
following conditions:
• When any part of the power cord, plug or connecting cable is damaged or frayed.
• If liquid has been spilled into the machine.
• If the machine has been exposed to rain or water.
• If the machine does not operate properly after instructions have been followed.
• If the machine has been dropped, or the cabinet appears damaged.
• If the machine exhibits a sudden and distinct change in performance.
14. Adjust only those controls covered by the operating instructions. Improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage, and
may require extensive work by a qualified service technician to restore the machine to normal operation.
15. Avoid using this machine during a lightning storm. There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning. If possible, unplug the
AC power and telephone cord for the duration of the lightning storm.
16. The Power cord supplied with your machine should be used for safe operation. If you are using a cord which is longer than 2 m with
110 V machine, then it should be 16 AWGa or bigger.
17. Use only No.26 AWG* or larger telephone line cord.
18. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS
19. This machine can be operated only in the country you have purchased. (Due to different voltage, frequency, telecommunication
configuration and etc.)
a.AWG: American Wire Gauge
6
OZONE SAFETY
During normal operation, this machine produces ozone. The ozone produced does not present a hazard to the operator. However, it is
advisable that the machine be operated in a well ventilated area.
If you need additional information about ozone, request your nearest Samsung dealer.
MERCURY SAFETY
Contains Mercury, Dispose According to Local, State or Federal Laws.(U.S.A. only)
PERCHLORATE WARNING
This Perchlorate warning applies only to primary CR (Manganese Dioxide) Lithium coin cells in the product sold or distributed ONLY in California
USA.
Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. (U.S.A. only)
POWER SAVER
This printer contains advanced energy conservation technology that reduces power consumption when it is not in active use.
When the printer does not receive data for an extended period of time, power consumption is automatically lowered.
ENERGY STAR and the ENERGY STAR mark are registered U.S. marks.
For more information on the ENERGY STAR program see http://www.energystar.gov
RECYCLING
Please recycle or dispose of the packaging material for this product in an environmentally responsible manner.
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THIS PRODUCT (WASTE ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT)
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems)
This marking shown on the product or its literature, indicates that it should not be disposed with other household wastes at the end of its
working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate this from other
types of wastes and recycle it responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources.
Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and
how they can take this item for environmentally safe recycling.
Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product should not be mixed
with other commercial wastes for disposal.
7
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF BATTERIES IN THIS PRODUCT
(Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems.)
This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed with other household
waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium
or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to
human health or the environment.
To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through
your local, free battery return system.
RADIO FREQUENCY EMISSIONS
FCC Information to the User
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference, and
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These
limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses
and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to
radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to
try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or experienced radio TV technician for help.
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus as set out in the interference-causing
equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus”, ICES-003 of the Industry and Science Canada.
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites de bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la
norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils Numériques”, ICES-003 édictée par l’Industrie et Sciences Canada.
FAX BRANDING
The Telephone Consumer Protection Act of 1991 makes it unlawful for any person to use a computer or other electronic device to send any
message via a telephone facsimile machine unless such message clearly contains in a margin at the top or bottom of each transmitted page or
on the first page of the transmission the following information:
(1) the date and time of transmission
(2) identification of either business, business entity or individual sending the message; and
(3) telephone number of either the sending machine, business, business entity or individual.
The Telephone Company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment operations or procedures where such action is
reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with the rules and regulations in FCC Part 68. If such changes can
be reasonably expected to render any customer terminal equipment incompatible with telephone company communications facilities, or
require modification or alteration of such terminal equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use or performance, the customer shall be given
adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service
Change or modifications not expressly approved by the manufacturer responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
8
RINGER EQUIVALENCE NUMBER
The Ringer Equivalence Number and FCC Registration Number for this machine may be found on the label located on the bottom or rear of
the machine. In some instances you may need to provide these numbers to the telephone company.
The Ringer Equivalence Number (REN) is a measure of the electrical load placed on the telephone line, and is useful for determining whether
you have “overloaded” the line. Installing several types of equipment on the same telephone line may result in problems making and receiving
telephone calls, especially ringing when your line is called. The sum of all Ringer Equivalence Numbers of the equipment on your telephone
line should be less than five in order to assure proper service from the telephone company. In some cases, a sum of five may not be usable on
your line. If any of your telephone equipment is not operating properly, you should immediately remove it from your telephone line, as it may
cause harm to the telephone network.
The equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements adopted by the ACTA. On the rear of this equipment is a label
that contains, among other information, a product identifier in the format US:AAAEQ##TXXXX. If requested, this number must be provided to
the telephone company.
You should also know that:
• Your machine is not designed to be connected to a digital PBX system.
• If you intend to use a computer modem or fax modem on the same phone line as your machine, you may experience transmission and
reception problems with all the equipment. It is recommended that no other equipment, except for a regular telephone, share the line with
your machine.
• If your area experiences a high incidence of lightning or power surges, we recommend that you install surge protectors for both the power
and the telephone lines. Surge protectors can be purchased from your dealer or telephone and electronic specialty stores.
• When programming emergency numbers and/or making test calls to emergency numbers, use a non-emergency number to advise the
emergency service dispatcher of your intentions. The dispatcher will give you further instructions on how to actually test the emergency
number.
• This machine may not be used on coin service or party lines.
• This machine provides magnetic coupling to hearing aids.
You may safely connect this equipment to the telephone network by means of a standard modular jack, USOC RJ-11C.
REPLACING THE FITTED PLUG (FOR UK ONLY)
Important
The mains lead for this machine is fitted with a standard (BS 1363) 13 amp plug and has a 13 amp fuse. When you change or examine the
fuse, you must re-fit the correct 13 amp fuse. You then need to replace the fuse cover. If you have lost the fuse cover, do not use the plug until
you have another fuse cover.
Please contact the people from you purchased the machine.
The 13 amp plug is the most widely used type in the UK and should be suitable. However, some buildings (mainly old ones) do not have
normal 13 amp plug sockets. You need to buy a suitable plug adaptor. Do not remove the moulded plug.
Important warning:
You must earth this machine.
The wires in the mains lead have the following color code:
• Green and Yellow: Earth
• Blue: Neutral
FCC Regulations state that changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the manufacturer could void the
user’s authority to operate this equipment. In the event that terminal equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone
company should notify the customer that service may be stopped. However, where prior notice is impractical, the company may
temporarily cease service, providing that they:
a) promptly notify the customer.
b) give the customer an opportunity to correct the equipment problem.
c) inform the customer of the right to bring a complaint to the Federal Communication Commission pursuant to procedures set out in
FCC Rules and Regulations Subpart E of Part 68.
If you cut off the moulded plug, get rid of it straight away.
You cannot rewire the plug and you may receive an electric shock if you plug it into a socket.
9
•Brown: Live
If the wires in the mains lead do not match the colors marked in your plug, do the following:
You must connect the green and yellow wire to the pin marked by the letter “E” or by the safety ‘Earth symbol’ or colored green and yellow or
green.
You must connect the blue wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “N” or colored black.
You must connect the brown wire to the pin which is marked with the letter “L” or colored red.
You must have a 13 amp fuse in the plug, adaptor, or at the distribution board.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY (EUROPEAN COUNTRIES)
Approvals and Certifications
The CE marking applied to this product symbolizes Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Declaration of Conformity with the following applicable 93/
68/EEC Directives of the European Union as of the dates indicated:
The declaration of conformity may be consulted at www.samsung.com/printer, go to Support > Download center and enter your printer name
to browse the EuDoC.
January 1, 1995: Council Directive 2006/95/EC Approximation of the laws of the member states related to low voltage equipment.
January 1, 1996: Council Directive 2004/108/EC (92/31/EEC), approximation of the laws of the Member States related to electromagnetic
compatibility.
March 9, 1999: Council Directive 1999/5/EC on radio equipment and telecommunications terminal equipment and the mutual recognition of
their conformity. A full declaration, defining the relevant Directives and referenced standards can be obtained from your Samsung Electronics
Co., Ltd. representative.
EC Certification
Certification to 1999/5/EC Radio Equipment & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment Directive (FAX)
This Samsung product has been self-certified by Samsung for pan-European single terminal connection to the analogue public switched
telephone network (PSTN) in accordance with Directive 1999/5/EC. The product has been designed to work with the national PSTNs and
compatible PBXs of the European countries:
In the event of problems, you should contact the Euro QA Lab of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. in the first instance.
The product has been tested against TBR21. To assist in the use and application of terminal equipment which complies with this standard, the
European Telecommunication Standards Institute (ETSI) has issued an advisory document (EG 201 121) which contains notes and additional
requirements to ensure network compatibility of TBR21 terminals. The product has been designed against, and is fully compliant with, all of the
relevant advisory notes contained in this document.
OPENSSL LICENSE
Copyright (c) 1998-2001 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
without
5. prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
6. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
permission of the OpenSSL Project.
7. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the
OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
10
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young(eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
ORIGINAL SSLEAY LICENSE
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.
This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with
Netscapes SSL.
This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions apply
to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with
this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric
Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be
given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in
documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes
cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library
being used are not cryptographic related:-).
4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an
acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply
be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU Public Licence.]
11
contents
1 Features of your new laser MFP
4 Safety Information
INTRODUCTION
18
18 Printer overview
18 Front view
18 Rear view
19 Control panel overview
20 Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons
20 Touch screen
20 Machine Setup button
20 Job Status button
20 Power Saver button
21 Interrupt button
21 Understanding the Status LED
22 Menu overview
22 Main screen
22 Machine Setup button
23 Job Status button
24 Supplied software
24 Printer driver features
24 Printer driver
GETTING STARTED
25
25 Setting up the hardware
25 Setting up the network
25 Supported operating systems
26 Configuring network protocol via the machine
26 System requirements
26 Windows
27 Macintosh
27 Linux
27 Installing the software
29 Machine's basic settings
29 Altitude adjustment
29 Setting the authentication password
29 Setting the date and time
29 Changing the display language
29 Setting job timeout
29 Using energy saving feature
30 Setting the default tray and paper
30 Changing the default settings
30 IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
31 IP setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)
31 IP setting using SetIP Program (Linux)
31 Understanding the keyboard
LOADING ORIGINALS AND PRINT MEDIA
33
33 Loading originals
33 On the scanner glass
33 In the DADF
34 Selecting print media
35 Specification on print media
36 Media sizes supported in each mode
36 Guidelines for special print media
37 Changing the size of the paper in the paper tray
38 Loading paper
contents
12
38 Loading paper in tray 1, optional tray or optional high capacity feeder
39 In the multi-purpose tray
40 Setting the paper size and type
COPYING
41
41 Understanding the Copy screen
41 Basic tab
41 Advanced tab
42 Image tab
42 Copying originals
42 Changing the settings for each copy
42 Changing the size of originals
43 Reducing or enlarging copies
43 Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)
44 Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)
44 Selecting the type of originals
44 Changing the darkness
44 Using special copy features
44 Merging multiple jobs as a single copy
45 ID card copying
45 Copying ID with the manual ID copy option
46 2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)
46 Poster copying
46 Clone copying
47 Book copying
47 Booklet copying
47 Cover copying
47 Transparency copying
48 Erasing edges
48 Erasing background images
48 Shifting margins
48 Watermark copying
49 Overlay copying
49 Auto crop copying
SCANNING
50
50 Scanning basics
50 Understanding the Scan screen
51 Basic tab
52 Advanced tab
52 Image tab
52 Output tab
52 Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)
52 Sending a scanned image to several destinations as an email attachment
53 Scanning and sending multiple documents in a single email
53 Setting up an email account
54 Storing email addresses
54 Entering email addresses by the address book
55 Entering email addresses by the keyboard
55 Using Samsung Scan Manager
55 Set Scan Button tab
56 Change Port tab
56 Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)
56 Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP
56 Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server
56 Scanning and sending multiple documents to SMB/FTP server(s) at once
57 Changing the scan feature settings
57 Duplex
13
contents
57 Resolution
57 Original Size
58 Original Type
58 Color Mode
58 Darkness
58 Erase Background
58 Scan to Edge
58 Quality
59 File Format
59 PDF Encryption
59 Scan Preset
BASIC PRINTING
60
60 Printing a document
60 Canceling a print job
FAXING (OPTIONAL)
61
61 Preparing to fax
61 Understanding the Fax screen
61 Basic tab
62 Advanced tab
62 Image tab
62 Sending a fax
62 Setting the fax header
62 Sending a fax
63 Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)
63 Automatic resending
63 Redialing the last number
63 Delaying a fax transmission
64 Sending a priority fax
64 Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission
64 Receiving a fax
64 Changing the receive modes
64 Receiving manually in Telephone mode
64 Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax mode
65 Receiving faxes manually using an extension telephone
65 Receiving in secure receiving mode
65 Receiving faxes in memory
65 Adjusting the document settings
65 Duplex
65 Resolution
65 Original Type
65 Darkness
65 Erase Background
66 Color Mode
66 Setting up a fax phonebook
66 Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.)
66 Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.)
67 Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru™ Web Service
67 Using the polling option
67 Storing the originals for polling
67 Printing (Deleting) the polling document
67 Polling a remote fax
68 Polling from a remote Mailbox
68 Using Mailbox
68 Creating Mailbox
contents
14
68 Storing originals in Mailbox
69 Faxing to a remote Mailbox
69 Printing a report after sending a fax
69 Sending a fax in toll save time
70 Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job
70 Forwarding a received fax to other destination
70 Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax
70 Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a fax
70 Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an email
70 Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an email
71 Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server
71 Forwarding a received fax to other destination by server
71 Setting up the end Fax tone
71 Sending a fax from a Computer
71 Sending a fax from your Computer
71 Checking a sent fax list
USING USB MEMORY DEVICE
72
72 About USB memory
72 Understanding the USB screen
72 Plugging in a USB memory device
73 Scanning to an USB memory device
73 Scanning
73 Scan to USB
73 Basic tab
73 Advanced tab
73 Image tab
74 Output tab
74 Changing the scan feature settings
74 Duplex
74 Resolution
74 Original Size
74 Original Type
74 Color Mode
75 Darkness
75 Erase Background
75 Scan to Edge
75 Quality
75 Scan Preset
75 File Format
75 File Policy
76 Printing from a USB memory device
76 To print a document from a USB memory device:
USING DOCUMENT BOX
77
77 About Document Box
77 Understanding the Document box screen
77 Document Box Screen
78 Box Adding Screen
78 Edit a Box Screen
78 Document List Screen
78 Storing documents to Document box
78 Storing documents from document box
78 Storing documents during copy, scan, fax function
15
contents
USING STANDARD WORKFLOW
80
80 About Standard Workflow
80 Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen
80 Workflow Screen
81 Workform Creating Screen
81 Various Operations with Workform
82 Scan to multi-destination
82 Fax forwarding
82 Auto redirection
82 Delayed start feature
82 Notification feature
82 Approval feature
MACHINE STATUS AND ADVANCED SETUP
83
83 Machine Setup
83 Machine Status screen
83 Admin Setting screen
83 Browsing the machine’s status
84 General settings
86 Copy Setup
86 Fax Setup
87 Network Setup
88 Security
88 Access Control
91 Log
91 Change Admin. Password
91 Information Hiding
91 Optional Service
92 Document Box Management
92 Standard Workflow Management
93 Printing a report
MAINTENANCE
94
94 Printing a machine report
94 Monitoring the supplies life
94 Finding the serial number
94 Sending the imaging unit reorder notification
94 Sending the toner reorder notification
94 Checking Document Box
94 Cleaning your machine
95 Cleaning the outside
95 Cleaning the inside
95 Cleaning the transfer unit
95 Cleaning the scan unit
95 Maintaining the Toner cartridge
95 Toner cartridge storage
96 Handling instructions
96 Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge
96 Estimated cartridge life
96 Replacing the toner cartridge
97 Maintaining the imaging unit
97 Expected cartridge life
97 Replacing the imaging unit
99 Maintenance Parts
99 Managing your machine from the website
99 To access SyncThru™ Web Service:
contents
16
TROUBLESHOOTING
100
100 Tips for avoiding paper jams
100 Clearing document jams
101 Misfeed of exiting paper
101 Roller misfeed
102 Clearing paper jams
102 In the tray 1
103 In the optional tray
104 In the optional high capacity feeder
106 In the multi-purpose tray
106 In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge
106 In the paper exit area
107 In the duplex unit area
107 In the stacker (finisher)
108 Understanding display messages
111 Solving other problems
111 Touch screen problem
111 Paper feeding problems
112 Printing problems
114 Printing quality problems
116 Copying problems
116 Scanning problems
117 Samsung Scan Manager Problem
117 Fax problems
117 Common PostScript problems
118 Common Windows problems
119 Common Linux problems
120 Common Macintosh problems
ORDERING SUPPLIES AND ACCESSORIES
121
121 Supplies
121 Accessories
122 How to purchase
INSTALLING ACCESSORIES
123
123 Precautions to take when installing accessories
123 Installing a memory DIMM
123 Installing a memory module
124 Activating the added memory in the PS printer properties
124 Replacing the Stapler
125 Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit
SPECIFICATIONS
126
126 General specifications
126 Printer specifications
127 Copier specifications
127 Scanner specifications
127 Facsimile specifications (optional)
17
contents
GLOSSARY
128
INDEX
132
Introduction_18
introduction
These are the main components of your machine:
This chapter includes
• Printer overview
• Control panel overview
• Introducing the touch screen and useful buttons
• Understanding the Status LED
• Menu overview
• Supplied software
• Printer driver features
z
PRINTER OVERVIEW
Front view
Rear view
1DADF document width
guides 11 Side cover
2DADF cover 12 Multi-purpose tray
3Output support 13 Front cover
4Tray 1 14 Multi-purpose tray
extension
5Optional traya15 Multi-purpose tray paper
width guides
6Standa16 Scanner lock switch
7DADF document input tray 17 Scanner glass
8DADF document output tray 18 toner cartridge
9scanner lid 19 imaging unit
10 Control panel
a.The symbol a is a mark for the optional device.
1Extension telephone socket
(EXT)a
a.The symbol a is a mark for the optional device.
7USB memory port
2Telephone line socket
(LINE)a8Power switch
3USB port 9Power receptacle
4network port 10 Finisher output tray
(Stacker & Stapler)a
5dummy for FDI (Foreign
Device Interfacea)11 finisher cover (Stacker &
Stapler)a
615-pin Finisher connection
(Stacker & Stapler)a12 finisher (Stacker & Stapler)a
19 _Introduction
CONTROL PANEL OVERVIEW
1Machine Setup Leads you to the machine setup and advanced
settings. (See "Machine Setup" on page 83.)
2Job Status Shows the jobs currently running, queued jobs or
completed jobs.
3Status Shows the status of your machine. (See
"Understanding the Status LED" on page 21.)
4Display screen Displays the current machine status and prompts
during an operation. You can set menus easily
using the touch screen.
5number keypad Dials fax number, and enters the number value
for document copies or other options.
6Clear Deletes characters in the edit area.
7Redial/Pause In standby mode, redials the last number, or in
edit mode, inserts a pause into a fax number.
8On Hook Dial Engages the telephone line.
9Interrupt Stops a job in process to do an urgent copy job.
10 Clear All Reverts the current settings to the default values.
11 Power Saver Sends the machine into the power saver mode.
(See "Using energy saving feature" on page 29.)
12 Stop Stops an operation at any time. The pop up
window appears on the screen showing the
current job that the user can stop or resume.
13 Start Starts a job.
• All illustrations on this user’s guide may differ from your machine
depending on its options or models.
• When you use the touch screen, use your finger only. The screen
may be damaged with a sharpen pen or else.
Introduction_20
INTRODUCING THE TOUCH SCREEN AND
USEFUL BUTTONS
Touch screen
The touch screen allows for user-friendly operation of the machine. Once
you press the home icon ( ) on the screen, it shows the Main screen.
•: Shows Help. You can find the explanation by feature
contents.
•Copy: Enters the Copy menu.
•Fax: Enters the Fax menu. (Optional)
•Scan: Enters Scan to Email, Scan to PC, Scan to Server menu.
•Document Box: Enters the Document Box menu. (See "Checking
Document Box" on page 94.)
•USB: When USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on
your machine, USB icon shows on the display screen.
•Logout: Logs out from the currently logged in account.
•Toner Info.: Shows amount of toner used.
•LCD Brightness: Adjusts the brightness of the touch screen.
• : To change the language that appears on the display.
• USB: guides you to remove the USB memory devices from the
machine. Follow the instruction on the LCD. This icon appears only
when you connect an USB memory module.
Machine Setup button
When you press this button, you can browse current machine settings or
change machine values. (See "Machine Setup" on page 83.)
•: This button allows you to move to Copy, Fax, Scan,
Document Box menu directly.
•Machine Status: Shows the current status of the machine.
•Admin Setting: Allows an administrator to set up the machine.
•Tray Management: Shows the currently installed tray and their
status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.
•Usage Page Report: You can print the report on the amount of
printouts depending on the paper size and type.
Job Status button
When you press this button, the screen shows the lists of currently running
jobs, queued jobs and completed jobs.
•Current Job tab: Shows the list of jobs in progress and pending.
•Completed Job tab: Provides the list of completed jobs.
•Active Notice tab: Displays any error codes that have occurred.
•No.: Gives the order of jobs. The job in No. 001 is currently in
progress.
•Job Name: Shows job information like name and type.
•Status: Gives the current status of each job.
•User:Provides user name, mainly computer name.
•Job Type: Displays details of the active job, such as job type,
recipient phone number and other information.
•Delete: Removes the selected job from the list.
•Delete All: Removes all the jobs from the list.
•Detail: Shows the detailed information of the selected option on the
Active Notice list.
•Close: Closes the job status window and switches to previous view.
Power Saver button
When the machine is not in use, save electricity with the provided power
save mode. Pressing this button puts the machine into power save mode.
(See "Using energy saving feature" on page 29.)
If you press this button for more than two seconds, a window appears,
requesting that you turn the power off. If you choose Yes, the power is
turned off. This button can also be used to turn the button on.
• Icons shown on the display screen such as Fax may be grayed
out, depending on the optional kit or program installed in your
machine.
• To switch the display screen and see other available icons, press
the right arrow on the display screen.
STATUS DESCRIPTION
Off The machine is not in the power save mode.
Blue On The machine is in the low power save mode.
Blink The machine is in the power save mode.
21 _Introduction
Interrupt button
When you press this button, the machine goes into interrupt mode which
means it stops a printing job for urgent copy job. When the urgent copy job
completes, the previous printing job continues.
UNDERSTANDING THE STATUS LED
When the problem occurs, the Status LED indicates the machine's
condition by the light color of it's action.
STATUS DESCRIPTION
Off The machine is not in interrupt printing mode.
Blue On The machine is in interrupt printing mode.
Interrupt mode is resumed at default value (Off) after the machine is
shut down or reset.
STATUS DESCRIPTION
Off • The machine is off-line.
• The machine is in power save mode. When
data is received, or any button is pressed, it
switches to on-line automatically.
Green Blinking • When the backlight slowly blinks, the machine
is receiving data from the computer.
• When the backlight blinks rapidly, the
machine is printing data.
On The machine is on-line and can be used.
Red Blinking • A minor error has occurred and the machine is
waiting the error to be cleared. Check the
display message. When the problem is
cleared, the machine resumes.
• The toner cartridge is low. Order a new toner
cartridge. You can temporarily improve print
quality by redistributing the toner. (See
"Replacing the toner cartridge" on page 96.)
On • The imaging unit is totally out of lifespan.
Remove the old imaging unit and install a new
one. (See "Replacing the imaging unit" on
page 97.)
• The toner cartridge is totally empty. Remove
the old toner cartridge and install a new one.
(See "Replacing the toner cartridge" on
page 96.)
• A paper jam has occurred. (See "Clearing
paper jams" on page 102.)
• The cover is opened. Close the cover.
• There is no paper in the tray. Load paper in
the tray.
• The machine has stopped due to a major
error. Check the display message. (See
"Understanding display messages" on
page 108.)
Check the message on the display screen, and follow the instruction
on the message or refer to Troubleshooting part. See
"Troubleshooting" on page 100. If the problem persists, call for
service.
Introduction_22
MENU OVERVIEW
The control panel provides access to various menus to set up the machine or use the machine's functions. These menus can be accessed by pressing Machine
Setup, Job Status, or touching menus on the display screen. Refer to the following diagram.
Main screen
The Main screen is shown on the display screen on the control panel. Some menus are grayed out depending on your model.
Machine Setup button
When you press the Machine Setup button on the control panel, the screen displays three menus. Machine Status shows the supplies life, billing, counters and
reports. Admin Setting lets you set the advanced setup to use your machine in depth and conveniently. Usage Page Report can print the report on the amount of
printouts depending on the paper size and type.
Machine Status
.
Copy
Basic tab (Page 41)
Original Size
Reduce/Enlarge
Duplex
Output
Original Type
Darkness
Paper Supply
Advanced tab (Page 41)
ID Copy
N-Up
Poster Copy
Clone Copy
Book Copy
Booklet
Covers
Transparencies
WaterMark
Overlay
Auto Crop
Copy (Continued)
Image tab (Page 42)
Erase Edge
Erase Background
Margin Shift
Fax
Basic tab (Page 61)
Address
Duplex
Resolution
Advanced tab (Page 62)
Original Size
Delay Send
Priority Send
Polling
Mailbox
Image tab (Page 62)
Original Type
Darkness
Erase Background
Color Mode
Scan
Scan to Email
Basic tab (Page 51)
Advanced tab
(Page 52)
Image tab (Page 52)
Output tab (Page 52)
Scan to PC
Scan to Server
Basic tab (Page 51)
Advanced tab
(Page 52)
Image tab (Page 52)
Output tab (Page 52)
Document Box
User Box tab (Page 94)
Add
Delete
Edit
Detail
Search
Enter
System Box tab
(Page 94)
Detail
Enter
USB
USB Format
USB Print
Scan to USB
Basic tab
Advanced tab
Image tab
Output tab
.
Supplies Life tab
(Page 83)
Toner Cartridge
Imaging Unit
Fuser Kit
Feed Roller Kit
Feed Roller Kit - Bypass
Tray
Document Feeder Roller
BTR Kit
DADF Friction Pad Kit
Machine Info tab
(Page 83)
Machine Details
Customer Support
Machine Serial
Number
IP Address
Hardware Options
Configuration
Software Versions
Tray Status
Tray
Status
Paper Size
Paper Type
Print/Report
System Report
Scan Report
Fax Report
Machine Info tab
(Continued)
Usage Counters
Total Impressions
Black Impressions
Black Copied
Impressions
Black Printed
Impressions
Sheets
Copied Sheets
Black Copied Sheets
Printed Sheets
Black Printed Sheets
2 Sided Sheets
Copied 2 Sided
Sheets
Machine Info tab
(Continued)
Black Copied 2-Sided
Sheets
Printed 2 Sided Sheets
Black Printed 2-Sided
Sheets
Analog Fax Sheets
Analog Fax 2-Sided
Sheets
Fax Image Received
Analog Fax Images
Sent
Analog Fax Images
Received
Images Sent
Network Scanning
Images Sent
Machine Info tab
(Continued)
Email Images Sent
Maintenance
Impressions
Black Maintenance
Impressions
23 _Introduction
Admin Setting
Usage Page Report
When the display “Are you sure you want to print it?” shows, press “Yes”.
Job Status button
This menu shows the job in process, in waiting, in completed and the notice message such as an error. (See "Job Status button" on page 20.)
.
General tab
(Page 84)
Device Info
Date & Time
Default Settings
Measurement
Timers
Language
Power Saver
Tray Management
Altitude Adjustment
Output Option
Contention Management
Sound
Supplies Management
Machine Test
Manual Image Overwrite
HDD Spooling
Stored Job File Policy
Country
Home Window
Background
Multi-Bin
Stamp
Setup tab
(Page 86)
Copy Setup
Fax Setup
Network Setup
Security
Optional Service
Document Box
Management
Standard Workflow
Management
Print/Report tab
(Page 93)
Print
Accounting Reports
Report
.
Current Job tab
Detail
Delete
Delete All
Completed Job tab
Detail
Active Notice tab
Detail
Introduction_24
SUPPLIED SOFTWARE
After you have set up your machine and connected it to your computer, you
must install the printer software. If you are a Windows or Macintosh OS,
install the software from the supplied CD and if you are a Linux OS user,
download the software from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/
printer) and install.
PRINTER DRIVER FEATURES
Your printer drivers support the following standard features:
• Paper orientation, size, source and media type selection
• Number of copies
In addition, you can use various special printing features. The following
table shows a general overview of features supported by your printer
drivers:
Printer driver
OS CONTENTS
Windows •Printer driver: Use this driver to take full
advantage of your printer’s features.
•Postscript printer driver: Use the PostScript
driver to print documents with complex fonts and
graphics in the PS language.
•Scanner driver: TWAIN and Windows Image
Acquisition (WIA) drivers are available for
scanning documents on your machine.
•Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor
the machine’s status and alerts you when an error
occurs during printing.
•SmarThru Officea: This is the accompanying
Windows-based software for your multifunctional
machine.
•
Samsung Scan Manager
: This program allows you
to scan a document on your machine and save it to
a network-connected computer.
•Direct Printing Utility: This program allows you
to print PDF files directly.
•Samsung Network PC Fax: This program allows
you to send a fax from you computer.
•
SetIP
: Use this program to set your machine’s T
CP/
IP addresses. You can only use IPv4 setting for
SetIP.
a.Allows you to edit a scanned image in many ways using a powerful
image editor and to send the image by email. You can also open
another image editor program, like Adobe Photoshop, from SmarThru.
For details, please refer to the onscreen help supplied on the SmarThru
program.
Linux •Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file: Use
this file to run your machine from a Linux
computer and print documents.
•SANE: Use this driver to scan documents.
•Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor
the machine’s status and alerts you when an error
occurs during printing.
•
SetIP
: Use this program to set your machine’s T
CP/
IP addresses. You can only use IPv4 setting for
SetIP.
Macintosh •Postscript Printer Description (PPD) file: Use
this file to run your machine from a Macintosh
computer and print documents.
•Scanner driver: TWAIN driver is available for
scanning documents on your machine.
•Smart Panel: This program allows you to monitor
the machine’s status and alerts you when an error
occurs during printing.
•
SetIP
: Use this program to set your machine’s T
CP/
IP addresses. You can only use IPv4 setting for
SetIP.
FEATURE PCL 6 POSTSCRIPT
WINDOWS WINDOWS LINUX MACINTOSH
Toner save OOOO
Machine quality
option OOOO
Poster printing OXXX
Multiple pages
per sheet (N-up) OOO (2, 4)O
Fit to page
printing OOOO
Scale printing OOOO
Different source
for first page OXXO
Watermark OXXX
Overlay OXXX
Duplexa
a.The machine with Duplex feature prints both side of a paper.
OOOO
Secu Print OOXO
Scheduled Print OOXO
Spool Print OOXO
Proof Print OOXX
Stapler OOOO
25 _Getting Started
getting started
This chapter gives you step-by-step instructions for setting up the machine.
This chapter includes:
• Setting up the hardware
• Setting up the network
• System requirements
• Installing the software
• Machine's basic settings
• Understanding the keyboard
SETTING UP THE HARDWARE
This section shows the steps to set up the hardware which is explained in
the Quick Install Guide. Make sure you read Quick Install Guide and
complete following steps.
1. Select a stable location.
Select a level, stable place with adequate space for air circulation. Allow
extra space to open covers and trays.
The area should be well-ventilated and away from direct sunlight or
sources of heat, cold, and humidity. Do not set the machine close to the
edge of your desk or table.
Printing is suitable for altitudes under 1,000 m (3,281 ft). Refer to the
altitude setting to optimize your printing. See page 29 for more
information.
Place the machine on a flat, stable surface so that there is no incline
greater than 5 mm (0.02 inch). Otherwise, printing quality may be
affected.
2. Unpack the machine and check all the enclosed items.
3. Remove the tape holding the machine tightly.
4. Install both the print cartridge and imaging unit.
5. Load paper. (See "Loading paper" on page 38.)
6. Make sure that all the cables are connected to the machine.
7. Turn the machine on.
SETTING UP THE NETWORK
You need to set up the network protocols on the machine to use it as your
network printer. You can set up the basic network settings with the
machine's touch screen.
Supported operating systems
The following table shows the network environments supported by the
machine:
• This equipment will be inoperable when mains power fails.
• When you move the machine, do not tilt or turn it upside down.
Otherwise, the inside of the machine may be contaminated by
toner, which can cause damage to the machine or bad printing
quality.
• If you are moving the machine or if machine is not in use for a long
time, turn on the power and wait until it goes in to the ready mode.
Then close the scan lid and turn the power off. And open the scan
lid and lock the scanner lock.
If you want to use the USB cable, connect the cable between a
computer and you machine. Then, refer to Software section.
ITEM REQUIREMENTS
Network interface Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base-TX
Network operating system • Novell NetWare 5.x, 6.x
• Windows 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista/7/
Server 2008 R2
• Various Linux OS
• Mac OS 10.3 ~ 10.6
Network protocols •TCP/IP
•EtherTalk
Dynamic addressing
server DHCP, BOOTP
Getting Started_26
Configuring network protocol via the machine
You can set up TCP/IP network parameters, follow the steps listed below.
1. Make sure your machine is connected to the network with an RJ-45
Ethernet cable.
2. Make sure you have turned on the machine.
3. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
4. Press Admin Setting.
5. When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the password
input area, then the question marks appears. Use the number keypad on
the control panel to enter the password. Once the password is entered,
press OK. (Factory setting:1111)
6. Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.
7. Select TCP/IP Protocol.
• Apple Talk Protocol: This protocol is widely used in Macintosh
network environments.
• Ethernet Speed: You can select the communication speed for
Ethernet connections.
8. Press IP Setting.
9. Select Static and then enter IP Address, Subnet Mask and Gateway
address fields. Touch the input area then, enter addresses by number
keypad on the control panel.
10. Press OK.
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Before you begin, ensure that your system meets the following
requirements:
Windows
If you are in a non-static IP address environment and need to set up a
DHCP network protocol, go to http://developer.apple.com/networking/
bonjour/download/, select the Bonjour program that is appropriate for
your computer operating system and install the program. This program
will allow you to set network parameters automatically. Follow the
instructions in the installation window. This program does not support
Linux.
Contact the network administrator if you are not sure how to configure.
You can also set up the network settings through the network
administration programs.
•
SyncThru™ Web Admin Service
: Web-based printer
management solution for network administrators.
SyncThru™
Web Admin Service
provides you with an efficient way of
managing network devices and lets you remotely monitor and
troubleshoot network machines from any site with corporate
internet access. Download this program from http://
solution.samsungprinter.com.
•
SyncThru™ Web Service
: Web server embedded on your
network print server, which allows you to:
- Configure the network parameters necessary for the machine to
connect to various network environments.
- Customize machine settings.
- Customize email settings and set up address book for scanning
to email.
- Customize server settings and set up address book for scanning
to the FTP or SMB servers.
- Customize printer, copy, and fax settings
•
SetIP
: Utility program allowing you to select a network interface
and manually configure the IP addresses for use with the TCP/IP
protocol. See "IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)" on
page 30, "IP setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)" on
page 31, or"IP setting using SetIP Program (Linux)" on page 31.
•AnyWeb Print: This tool helps you to screen-capture, preview,
scrap and print the screen of Windows Internet Explorer more
easily, than when you use the ordinary program. Click Start > All
Programs > you machine name > AnyWeb Print to link the
website where the tool is available for the download. This tool is
available only for Windows operating systems.
OS
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)
CPU RAM FREE HDD
SPACE
Windows 2000 Pentium II 400 MHz
(Pentium III 933 MHz) 64 MB
(128 MB) 600 MB
Windows XP Pentium III 933 MHz
(Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB
(256 MB) 1.5 GB
Windows
Server 2003 Pentium III 933 MHz
(Pentium IV 1 GHz) 128 MB
(512 MB) 1.25 GB to
2 GB
Windows
Server 2008 Pentium IV 1 GHz
(Pentium IV 2 GHz) 512 MB
(2048 MB) 10 GB
Windows
Vista Pentium IV 3 GHz 512 MB
(1024 MB) 15 GB
27 _Getting Started
Macintosh
Linux
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
You have to install the machine software for printing. The software includes
drivers, applications, and other user friendly programs.
1. Make sure that the network setup for your machine is completed. (See
"Setting up the network" on page 25.) All applications should be closed
on your computer before beginning installation.
2. Insert the Printer Software CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window
appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click Start > Run. Type
X:\Setup.exe, replacing “X” with the letter which represents your drive
and click OK.
If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2,
click Start > All Programs > Accessories > Run, and type
X:\Setup.exe.
If the AutoPlay window appears in Windows vista, Windows 7 and
Windows Server 2008 R2, click Run Setup.exe in Install or run
program field, and click Continue in the User Account Control
window.
3. Click Next.
Windows 7 Pentium IV 1 GHz 32-
bit or 64-bit processor
or higher
1 GB
(2 GB) 16 GB
• Support for DirectX 9 graphics with 128 MB
memory(to enable the Aero theme).
• DVD-R/W Drive
Windows
Server 2008
R2
Pentium IV 1
GHz(x86) or
1.4GHz(x64)
processors(2GHz or
faster)
512 MB
(2048 MB) 10 GB
• Internet Explorer 5.0 or higher is the minimum requirement for all
Windows operating systems.
• Users who have an administrator right can install the software.
•Windows Terminal Services is compatable with this machine.
OPERATIN
G SYSTEM
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)
CPU RAM FREE HDD
SPACE
Mac OS X
10.3 ~ 10.4 • PowerPC G4/
G5
• Intel
processors
• 128 MB for a
PowerPC based
MAC (512 MB)
• 512 MB for an
Intel based MAC
(1 GB)
1GB
Mac OS X
10.5 • 867 MHz or
faster
PowerPC G4/
G5
• Intel
processors
512 MB (1 GB) 1 GB
Mac OS X
10.6 • Intel Processor 1 GB (2 GB) 1 GB
OS
REQUIREMENT (RECOMMENDED)
CPU RAM FREE HDD
SPACE
ITEM REQUIREMENTS
Operating system RedHat Enterprise Linux WS 4, 5 (32/64bit)
Fedora Core 2~9 (32/64bit)
SuSE Linux 9.1 (32bit)
SuSE Linux 9.2, 9.3, 10.0, 10.1, 10.2, 10.3,
11.0 (32/64bit)
Mandrake 9.2 (32bit), 10.0, 10.1 (32/64bit)
Mandriva 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 (32/64bit)
Ubuntu 6.06, 6.10, 7.04, 7.10, 8.04 (32/64bit)
SuSE Linux Enterprise Desktop 9, 10 (32/64bit)
Debian 3.1, 4.0 (32/64bit)
CPU Pentium IV 2.4GHz (IntelCore2)
RAM 512 MB (1024 MB)
free HDD space 1GB (2GB)
• It is necessary to claim swap partition of 300 MB or larger for
working with large scanned images.
• The Linux scanner driver supports the optical resolution at
maximum.
• The following procedure is for when the machine is being used as
a network machine. If you want to connect a machine with a USB
cable, refer to Software section.
• The following procedure is based on the Windows XP operating
system. The procedure and popup window which appears during
the installation may differ depending on the operating system, the
printer feature, or the interface in use. (See Software section.)
Getting Started_28
• The window above may slightly differ, if you are reinstalling the
driver.
4. Select Typical installation for a network printer, and then click Next.
5. The list of machines available on the network appears. Select the printer
you want to install from the list and then click Next.
• If you do not see your machine on the list, click Update to refresh the
list, or select Add TCP/IP Port to add your machine to the network.
To add the machine to the network, enter the port name and the IP
address for the machine.
To verify your machine’s IP address or the MAC address, print a
Network Configuration page. (See "Printing a report" on page 93.)
• To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select Shared Printer
[UNC] and enter the shared name manually or find a shared printer
by clicking the Browse button.
6. After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to print a
test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung machines in
order to receive information from Samsung. If you so desire, select the
corresponding checkbox(es) and click Finish.
If you are not sure of the IP address, contact your network
administrator or print network information. (See "Printing a
report" on page 93.)
• If your machine does not work properly after the installation, try
to reinstall the printer driver. See Software section.
• During the printer driver installation process, the driver installer
detects the location information for your operating system and
sets the default paper size for your machine. If you use a
different Windows location, you must change the paper size to
match the paper you usually use. Go to printer properties to
change the paper size after installation is complete.
29 _Getting Started
MACHINE'S BASIC SETTINGS
After installation is complete, you may want to set the machine's default
settings. Refer to the next section if you would like to set or change values.
Altitude adjustment
The print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure, which is determined
by the height of the machine above sea level. The following information will
guide you on how to set your machine to the best print quality or best quality
of print.
Before you set the altitude value, find the altitude where you are using the
machine.
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click Go
to access the web site of your machine.
2. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
3. Click Settings > Machine Settings > System > Setup > Altitude Adj.
4. Select the appropriate altitude value.
5. Click Apply.
Setting the authentication password
To set your machine up or change the settings, you have to login. To
change password, follow the next steps.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password. Touch the password
input area, then the question marks appears, use the number keypad on
the control panel to enter the password. Then, press OK. (Factory
setting:1111)
4. Press the Setup tab > Authentication.
5. Press
Change Admin. Password
.
6. Enter old and new password, and then confirm the new password.
7. Press OK.
Setting the date and time
When you set the time and date, they are used in Delay fax and Delay Print,
also they are printed on reports. If, however, they are not correct, you need
to change it for correct time being.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 29.)
4. Press the General tab > Date & Time > Date & Time.
5. Select date and time using left/right arrows. Or touch the insert area and
use the numeric keypad on the control panel.
6. Press OK.
Changing the display language
To change the language that appears on the display, refer to the following
steps.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 29.)
4. Press the General tab.
5. Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Language.
6. Select the desired language.
7. Press OK.
Setting job timeout
When there is no input for a certain period of time, the machine exits the
current location. You can set the amount of time the machine will wait.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 29.)
4. Press the General tab.
5. Press Timers.
6. Select System Timeout.
• You can set the Held Job Timeout option to over one hour.
7. Select On.
8. Select a duration using left/right arrows.
9. Press OK.
Using energy saving feature
The machine provides energy saving features.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 29.)
4. Press the General tab.
5. Press down arrow to switch the screen, press Power Saver.
1Normal
2High 1
3High 2
4High 3
0
If power to the machine is cut off, you need to reset the correct time
and date once the power has been restored.
To change the format of date and time, press Date Format and Time
Format.
Getting Started_30
6. Select appropriate option and time.
•Scan Power Save: Turns off the scanner lamp under the glass.
•Low Power Save: Keeps the temperature of the fuser unit under
125 °C, and turns off the fans within the machine except a core fan
for the fuser unit.
•Power Save: Turns off all the fans even for the fuser unit after
certain time.
7. Press OK.
Setting the default tray and paper
You can select the tray and paper you would like to keep using for printing
job. (See "General settings" on page 84.)
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 29.)
4. Press the General tab.
5. Press the down arrow to switch the screen and press Tray
Management.
6. Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.
7. Press OK.
Changing the default settings
You can set the default values for copy, fax, email, scan and paper all at
once.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 29.)
4. Press the General tab > Default Settings > Default Option.
5. Press the function you want to change, and change its settings.
For example, if you want to change the default setting of the brightness
& darkness for a copy job, press Copy > Darkness and adjust the
brightness & darkness.
6. Press OK.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Windows)
This program is for manually setting the network IP address of your machine
using its MAC address to communicate with the machine. A MAC address is
the hardware serial number of the network interface and can be found in the
Network Configuration Report.
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by
performing the following:
1. Open Control Panel.
2. Double click Security Center.
3. Click Windows Firewall.
4. Disable the firewall.
Installing the program
1. Insert the driver CD provided along with your machine. When the driver
CD runs automatically, close the window.
2. Start Windows Explorer and open the X drive. (X represents the name
of your CD-ROM drive.)
3. Double-click Application > SetIP.
4. Double-click Setup.exe to install this program.
5. Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation.
Starting the program
1. Connect your machine and the computer using network cable.
2. Turned on the machine.
3. From the Windows Start menu, select All Programs > Samsung
Printers > SetIP > SetIP.
4. Click on the icon (third from left) in the SetIP window to open the
TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the machine’s new information into the configuration window as
follows:
•MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network
Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example,
00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
If the optional tray is not installed, the tray options on the screen is
grayed out.
You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP.
MAC address is a hardware serial number of the machine’s
network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration
Report. (See "Printing out the machine’s MAC address" on
page 31.)
31 _Getting Started
•IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your machine.
•Subnet Mask: Enter a new Subnet Mask for your machine.
•Default Gateway: Enter ta new Gateway for your machine.
6. Click Apply, and then click OK. The machine will automatically print the
Network Configuration Report. Confirm that all the settings are
correct.
7. Click Exit to close the SetIP program.
8. If necessary, restart the computer’s firewall.
Printing out the machine’s MAC address
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab > Print/Report.
3. Press
System Report
.
4. Scroll down the list on the right and select Network Configuration
Report.
5. Press Print.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Macintosh)
For using SetIP program, disable the computer firewall before continuing by
performing the following:
1. Open System Preferences.
2. Click Security.
3. Click the Firewall menu.
4. Turn firewall off.
Starting the program
1. Connect your machine and the computer using network cable.
2. Insert the driver CD-ROM, and open the disk window. Open the
MAC_Installer > MAC_Printer > SetIP > SetIPapplet.html.
3. Double click the file and Safari will automatically open, then select
Trust. The browser will open the SetIPapplet.html page that shows the
printer’s name and IP address information.
4. Highlight the printer information row and select the Setup icon, which is
the second icon from the left in the application menu bar. A TCP/IP
Configuration window will open.
5. Enter the printer’s new information into the configuration window as
follows. In a corporate intranet, you may need to have this information
assigned by a network manager before proceeding.
•MAC Address: Find the machine’s MAC address from the Network
Configuration Report and enter it without the colons. For example,
00:15:99:29:51:A8 becomes 0015992951A8.
•IP Address: Enter a new IP address for your machine.
•Subnet Mask: Enter a new Subnet Mask for your machine.
•Default Gateway: Enter ta new Gateway for your machine.
6. Select Apply, then OK, and OK again. The printer will automatically
print the configuration report. Confirm that all the settings are correct.
Quit Safari. You may close and eject the installation CD-ROM. If
necessary, restart the computer’s firewall. You have successfully
changed the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway.
IP setting using SetIP Program (Linux)
SetIP program should be automatically installed during the printer driver
installation.
1. Print the machine’s network configuration report to find your machine’s
MAC address. (See "Printing out the machine’s MAC address" on
page 31.)
2. Open the /opt/Samsung/mfp/share/utils/.
3. Double click the SetIPApplet.html file.
4. Click to open the TCP/IP configuration window.
5. Enter the network card’s MAC address, IP address, subnet mask,
default gateway, and then click Apply.
6. The machine prints the network information. Confirm all the settings are
correct.
7. Close the SetIP program.
UNDERSTANDING THE KEYBOARD
You can enter alphabet characters, numbers, or special symbols using the
keyboard on the touch screen. This keyboard is specially arranged like a
normal keyboard for better usability for the user.
Touch the input area where you need to enter characters and the keyboard
pops up on the screen. The keyboard below is the default showing the
lowercase letters.
You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP.
The following instructions may vary for your model.
If the printer was not shown in the information row, select the Manual
Setting icon (third from left) to open the TCP/IP Configuration window.
MAC address is a hardware serial number of the machine’s
network interface and can be found in the Network Configuration
Report. (See "Printing out the machine’s MAC address" on
page 31.)
You can only use IPv4 setting for SetIP.
When you enter the MAC address, enter it without a colon(:).
1Left/Right Moves the cursor between characters in the input
area.
2Backspace Deletes the character on the left side of the
cursor.
3Delete Deletes the character on the right side of the
cursor.
4Clear Deletes all characters in the input area.
5Input area Enters letters within this line.
6Shift Toggles between lowercase keys and uppercase
keys or vice versa.
7Symbols Switches from the alphanumeric keyboard to the
symbol keyboard.
8Space Enters a blank between characters.
Getting Started_32
9OK Saves and closes input result.
10 Cancel Cancels and closes input result.
If you enter the email address, then the keyboard for email pops up.
After you enter the address, press OK to activate entered address.
Press the arrow key on the side for rotating between From, To, Cc,
Bcc, Subject, Message in order.
33 _Loading originals and print media
loading originals and print media
This chapter introduces you to how to load originals and print media into your machine.
This chapter includes:
• Loading originals
• Selecting print media • Loading paper
• Setting the paper size and type
LOADING ORIGINALS
You can use the scanner glass or DADF to load an original for copying,
scanning, and sending a fax.
On the scanner glass
Make sure that no originals are in the DADF. If an original is detected in the
DADF, the machine gives it priority over the original on the scanner glass.
To get the best scan quality, especially for colored or gray-scaled images,
use the scanner glass.
1. Lift and open the scanner lid.
2. Place the original face down on the scanner glass and align it with the
registration guide at the top left corner of the glass.
3. Close the scanner lid.
In the DADF
Using the DADF, you can load up to 100 sheets of paper (75 g/m2, 20 lb) for
one job.
When you use the DADF:
• Do not load paper smaller than 174 x 128 mm (5.6 x 5.8 inches) or
larger than 218 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches).
• Do not attempt to load the following types of paper:
- carbon-paper or carbon-backed paper
- coated paper
- onion skin or thin paper
- wrinkled or creased paper
- curled or rolled paper
- torn paper
• Remove all staples and paper clips before loading.
• Make sure any glue, ink, or correction fluid on the paper is completely
dry before loading.
• Do not load originals that include different sizes or weights of paper.
• Do not load booklets, pamphlets, transparencies, or documents having
other unusual characteristics.
To load an original into the DADF:
1. Load the original face up into the DADF. Make sure that the bottom of
the original stack matches the paper size marked on the document input
tray.
• Leaving the scanner lid open while copying may affect copy quality
and toner consumption.
• Dust on the scanner glass may cause black spots on the printout.
Always keep it clean. (See "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 95.)
• If you are copying a page from a book or magazine, lift the scanner
lid until its hinges are caught by the stopper and then close the lid.
If the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm, start copying with
the lid open.
Loading originals and print media_34
2. Adjust the document width guides to the paper size. SELECTING PRINT MEDIA
You can print on a variety of print media, such as plain paper, envelopes,
labels, and transparencies. Always use print media that meet the guidelines
for use with your machine. Print media that does not meet the guidelines
outlined in this user’s guide may cause the following problems:
• Poor print quality
• Increased paper jams
• Premature wear on the machine.
Properties, such as weight, composition, grain, and moisture content, are
important factors that affect the machine’s performance and the output
quality. When you choose print materials, consider the following:
• The type, size and weight of the print media for your machine are
described later in this section.
• Desired outcome: The print media you choose should be appropriate for
your project.
• Brightness: Some print media are whiter than others and produce
sharper, more vibrant images.
• Surface smoothness: The smoothness of the print media affects how
crisp the printing looks on the paper.
Dust on the DADF glass may cause black lines on the printout. Always
keep it clean.
• Some print media may meet all of the guidelines in this section and
still not produce satisfactory results. This may be the result of
improper handling, unacceptable temperature and humidity levels,
or other variables over which Samsung has no control.
• Before purchasing large quantities of print media, ensure that
it
meets the requirements specified in this user’s guide.
Using print media that does not meet these specifications may cause
problems, requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by
Samsung’s warranty or service agreements.
35 _Loading originals and print media
Specification on print media
TYPE SIZE DIMENSIONS WEIGHTACAPACITYB
Plain paper Letter 216 x 279 mm (8.5 x 11 inches) • 60 to 90 g/m2 (16 to 24 lb
bond) for the tray
• 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb
bond) for the multi-purpose
tray
• 60 to 120 g/m2 (16 to 32 lb
bond) for the high capacity
feeder
• 500 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) paper for the tray
• 100 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) in the multi-purpose tray
• 2,100 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb
bond) in the high capacity
feederc
Legal 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
Folio 216 x 330 mm (8.5 x 13 inches)
A4 210 x 297 mm (8.26 x 11.69 inches)
Oficio 216 x 343 mm (8.5 x 13.5 inches)
JIS B5 182 x 257 mm (7.16 x 10.11 inches)
ISO B5 176 x 250 mm (6.93 x 9.84 inches)
Executive 184 x 267 mm (7.25 x 10.5 inches)
A5 148 x 210 mm (5.82 x 8.26 inches)
Statement 140 x 216 mm (5.5 x 8.5 inches)
A6 105 x 148 mm (4.13 x 5.82 inches)
Envelope Envelope B5 176 x 250 mm (6.92 x 9.84 inches) 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb
bond) • 50 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper for the tray
• 10 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb) in
the multi-purpose tray
Envelope Monarch 98 x 191 mm (3.87 x 7.5 inches)
Envelope No. 10 105 x 241 mm (4.12 x 9.5 inches)
Envelope DL 110 x 220 mm (4.33 x 8.66 inches)
Envelope C5 162 x 229 mm (6.37 x 9.01 inches)
Envelope C6 114 x 162 mm (4.48 x 6.38 inches)
Transparency Letter, A4, Oficio Refer to the Plain paper section 138 to 146 g/m2 (37 to 39 lb) • 100 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper for the tray
• 20 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb) in
the multi-purpose tray
Labels Letter, Legal, Folio,
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5,
Statement, Oficio, A6
Refer to the Plain paper section 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb
bond) • 100 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper for the tray
• 10 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb) in
the multi-purpose tray
Card stock Letter, Legal, Folio,
A4, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5,
Statement, Oficio, A6,
Post Card 4x6
Refer to the Plain paper section 90 to 220 g/m2 (24 to 58 lb
bond) • 50 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb)
paper for the tray
• 10 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb) in
the multi-purpose tray
Minimum size (custom) 98 x 148 mm (3.86 x 5.83 inches) 60 to 220 g/m2 (16 to 58 lb bond)
Maximum size (custom) 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)
a.If media weight is over 105 g/m2 (28 lb bond), use the multi-purpose tray.
b.Maximum capacity may differ depending on media weight, thickness, and environmental conditions.
c. High capacity feeder is not supported A6.
Loading originals and print media_36
Media sizes supported in each mode Guidelines for special print media
MODE SIZE SOURCE
Copy mode Letter, A4, Legal,
Oficio, Folio,
Executive, JIS B5, A5,
A6
• tray 1
• optional tray 2
• multi-purpose tray
• high capacity feeder
Single side printing All sizes supported by
the machine •tray1
• optional tray
• multi-purpose tray
• high capacity feeder
Duplex printinga
a.75 to 90 g/m2 (20 ~ 24 lb) only
Letter, A4, Legal, Folio,
Oficio, JIS B5, ISO B5,
Executive, A5,
Statement
•tray1
• optional tray
• multi-purpose tray
• high capacity feeder
Fax modeb
b.Only the optional fax kit is installed.
Letter, A4, Legal • tray 1
• optional tray
• high capacity feeder
MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES
Envelopes • Successful printing on envelopes depends upon the
quality of the envelopes. When selecting envelopes,
consider the following factors:
- Weight: The weight of the envelope paper should
not exceed 90 g/m2 or jamming may occur.
- Construction: Prior to printing, envelopes should
lie flat with less than 6 mm curl, and should not
contain air.
- Condition: Envelopes should not be wrinkled,
nicked, or otherwise damaged.
- Temperature: You should use envelopes that are
compatible with the heat and pressure of the
machine during operation.
• Use only well-constructed envelopes with sharp and
well creased folds.
• Do not use stamped envelopes.
• Do not use envelopes with clasps, snaps, windows,
coated lining, self-adhesive seals, or other synthetic
materials.
• Do not use damaged or poorly made envelopes.
• Be sure the seam at both ends of the envelope
extends all the way to the corner of the envelope.
1Acceptable
2Unacceptable
• Envelopes with a peel-off adhesive strip or with
more than one flap that folds over to seal must use
adhesives compatible with the machine’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s
specification to view the fusing temperature, see
page see "General specifications" on page 126. The
extra flaps and strips might cause wrinkling,
creasing, or jams, and may even damage the fuser.
• For the best print quality, position margins no closer
than 15 mm from the edges of the envelope.
• Avoid printing over the area where the envelope’s
seams meet.
37 _Loading originals and print media
CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE PAPER IN THE
PAPER TRAY
To load longer sizes of paper, such as Legal-sized paper, you need to
adjust the paper guides to extend the paper tray.
1. Adjust the paper length guide to the desired paper length. It is preset
to Letter or A4 size depending on the country. To load another size,
hold the lever and move the length guide to the corresponding
position.
Transparencies
• To avoid damaging the machine, use only
transparencies designed for use in laser printers.
• Transparencies used in the machine must be able
to withstand 180 °C, the machine’s fusing
temperature.
• Place them on a flat surface after removing them
from the machine.
• Do not leave them in the paper tray for long periods
of time. Dust and dirt may accumulate on them,
resulting in spotty printing.
• To avoid smudging caused by fingerprints, handle
them carefully.
• To avoid fading, do not expose printed
transparencies to prolonged sunlight.
• Ensure that transparencies are not wrinkled, curled,
or have any torn edges.
Labels • To avoid damaging the machine, use only labels
designed for use in laser machines.
- When selecting labels, consider the following fac-
tors:
- Adhesives: The adhesive material should be sta-
ble at your machine’s fusing temperature. Check
your machine’s specification to view the fusing
temperature, see page 126.
- Arrangement: Only use labels with no exposed
backing between them. Labels can peel off sheets
that have spaces between the labels, causing
serious jams.
- Curl: Prior to printing, labels must lie flat with no
more than 13 mm of curl in any direction.
- Condition: Do not use labels with wrinkles, bub-
bles, or other indications of separation.
• Make sure that there is no exposed adhesive
material between labels. Exposed areas can cause
labels to peel off during printing, which can cause
paper jams. Exposed adhesive can also cause
damage to machine components.
• Do not run a sheet of labels through the machine
more than once. The adhesive backing is designed
for only a single pass through the machine.
• Do not use labels that are separating from the
backing sheet or are wrinkled, bubbled, or otherwise
damaged.
Card stock or
custom-sized
materials
• Do not print on media smaller than 98 mm wide or
356 mm long.
• In the software application, set margins at least
6.4 mm away from the edges of the material.
MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES
Preprinted
paper • Letterhead must be printed with heat-resistant ink
that will not melt, vaporize, or release hazardous
emissions when subjected to the printer’s fusing
temperature for 0.1 second. Check your machine’s
specification to view the fusing temperature, see
page 126.
• Letterhead ink must be non-flammable and should
not adversely affect printer rollers.
• Forms and letterhead should be sealed in a
moisture-proof wrapping to prevent changes during
storage.
• Before you load preprinted paper, such as forms
and letterhead, verify that the ink on the paper is
dry. During the fusing process, wet ink can come off
preprinted paper, reducing print quality.
1paper length guide
2paper width guide
If you have installed an optional high capacity feeder, refer to Quick
Install Sheet to adjust paper size.
MEDIA TYPE GUIDELINES
Loading originals and print media_38
2. After inserting paper into the tray, while pinching the paper width
guide as shown, move it toward the stack of paper until it lightly
touches the side of the stack. Do not press the guide too tightly to the
edge of the paper; the guide may bend the paper.
When you use legal-sized paper, you need to extend the length of the
tray.
3. Load the paper into the tray.
4. Place the tray into the machine.
5. Set the paper size from your computer.
LOADING PAPER
Loading paper in tray 1, optional tray or optional
high capacity feeder
Load the print media you use for the majority of your print jobs in the tray 1.
The tray 1 can hold a maximum of 500 sheets of 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond) plain
paper.
You can purchase an optional tray and attach it below the standard tray to
load an additional 500 sheets of paper. (See "Supplies" on page 121.)
1. To load paper, pull and open the paper tray and place paper with the
side you want to print facing down.
2. After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the tray 1. See
"Setting the paper size and type" on page 40 for copying and faxing or
Software section for PC-printing.
• Do not push the paper width guides far enough to cause the
materials to warp.
• If you do not adjust the paper width guides, it may cause paper
jams.
Using photographic paper or coated paper may cause problems,
requiring repairs. Such repairs are not covered by Samsung’s
warranty or service agreement.
1Full
2Empty
Place the side to be printed facing up.
ENVELOPE PREPRINTED
PAPER TRANSPARENCY
PUNCHED PAPER CARD STOCK LETTERHEAD
PAPER
LABEL
• If you experience problems with paper feed, place one sheet at a
time in the multi-purpose tray.
• You can load previously printed paper. The printed side should be
facing up with an uncurled edge at the front. If you experience
problems with paper feed, turn the paper around. Note that print
quality is not guaranteed.
39 _Loading originals and print media
In the multi-purpose tray
The multi-purpose tray can hold special sizes and types of print material,
such as postcards, note cards, and envelopes. It is useful for single page
printing on letterhead or colored paper.
Tips on using the multi-purpose tray
• Load only one size of print media at a time in the multi-purpose tray.
• To prevent paper jams, do not add paper when there is still paper in
the multi-purpose tray. This also applies to other types of print
media.
• Print media should be loaded face down with the top edge going into
the multi-purpose tray first and be placed in the center of the tray.
• Always load only the specified print media to avoid paper jams and
print quality problems. (See "Selecting print media" on page 34.)
• Flatten any curl on postcards, envelopes, and labels before loading
them into the multi-purpose tray.
To load paper in the multi-purpose tray:
1. Open the multi-purpose tray and unfold the multi-purpose tray
extension, as shown.
2. If you are using paper, flex or fan the edge of the paper stack to
separate the pages before loading.
For transparencies, hold them by the edges and avoid touching the
print side. Oils from your fingers can cause print quality problems.
3. Load the paper.
Place the side to be printed facing down.
ENVELOPE PREPRINTED
PAPER TRANSPARENCY
PUNCHED PAPER CARD STOCK LETTERHEAD
PAPER
LABEL
Loading originals and print media_40
4. Squeeze the multi-purpose tray paper width guides and adjust them
to the width of the paper. Do not force too much, or the paper will be
bent, which will result in a paper jam or skew.
5. After loading paper, set the paper type and size for the multi-purpose
tray. See "Setting the paper size and type" on page 40 for copying
and faxing or the Software section for PC-printing.
6. After printing, fold the multi-purpose tray extension and close the
multi-purpose tray.
SETTING THE PAPER SIZE AND TYPE
After loading paper in the paper tray, you need to set the paper size and
type. These settings will apply to Copy and Fax modes.
For PC-printing, you need to select the paper size and type in the
application program you use on your PC.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 29.)
4. Press the General tab.
5. Press the down arrow to switch the screen, press Tray Management.
6. Select tray and its options such as paper size and type.
7. Press OK.
Depending on the media type you are using, keep the following
loading guidelines:
• Envelopes: Flap side down and with the stamp area on the
top left side.
• Transparencies: Print side up and the top with the adhesive
strip entering the machine first.
• Labels: Print side up and top short edge entering the machine
first.
• Preprinted paper: Design side up with the top edge toward the
machine.
• Card stock: Print side up and the short edge entering the
machine first.
• Previously printed paper: Previously printed side down with
an uncurled edge toward the machine.
The settings made from the printer driver override the settings on
the control panel.
41 _Copying
copying
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a copy machine.
This chapter includes
• Understanding the Copy screen
• Copying originals • Changing the settings for each copy
• Using special copy features
UNDERSTANDING THE COPY SCREEN
When you press Copy on the Main screen, the Copy screen appears which
has several tabs and lost of copying options. All the options are grouped by
features so that you can configure your selections easily.
If the screen displays an other menu, press ( ) to go to the Main screen.
Basic tab
•Original Size: Selects the size of the originals. (See "Changing the
size of originals" on page 42.)
•Reduce/Enlarge: Reduces or enlarges the size of a copied image.
(See "Reducing or enlarging copies" on page 43.)
•Duplex: Sets the machine to print copies on both sides of the paper.
(See "Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)" on page 43.)
•Output: Selects Collated or Uncollated copy options. If you install
the optional stacker & stapler, then the staple related option appears.
(See "Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)" on
page 44.)
•Original Type: Improves the copy quality by selecting the document
type for the current copy job. (See "Selecting the type of originals" on
page 44.)
•Light, Dark: Adjusts the brightness level to make a copy that is
easier to read, when the original contains faint markings and dark
images. (See "Changing the darkness" on page 44.)
•Paper Supply: Selects the paper supply tray.
•Saving to box: Sets the machine to save the originals to the
document box for later use.
Advanced tab
•Job Build: Allows you to copy several pages or different types of
originals into a single copy. (See "Merging multiple jobs as a single
copy" on page 44.).
•ID Copy: Prints 2-sided originals on one sheet of paper. This feature
is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a business card.
(See "ID card copying" on page 45.)
•N-Up: Prints 2 or 4 original images, reduced to fit onto one sheet of
paper. (See "Copying ID with the manual ID copy option" on
page 45.)
•Poster Copy: Prints a large image into divided 9 pages. (See
"Poster copying" on page 46.)
•Clone Copy: Prints multiple image copies from the original
document on a single page. (See "Clone copying" on page 46.)
•Book Copy: Allows you to copy an entire book. (See "Book
copying" on page 47.)
•Booklet: Creates booklets from a sequential set of either 1-sided or
2-sided originals. (See "Booklet copying" on page 47.)
•Covers: Automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock
taken from a different tray. (See "Cover copying" on page 47.)
•Transparencies: Adds a blank or printed divider between
transparencies within a set. (See "Transparency copying" on
page 47.)
•WaterMark: Prints an image with the added watermark. (See
"Watermark copying" on page 48.)
•Overlay: Prints an image with the image previously stored in your
machine. (See "Overlay copying" on page 49.)
•Auto Crop: Prints only the image of an original after cropping the
blank parts like the margin. (See "Auto crop copying" on page 49.)
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box chapter. (See "Using document box" on page 77.)
Copying_42
Image tab
•Erase Edge: Allows you to erase punch holes, staple marks, and
fold creases along any of the four documents edges. (See "Erasing
edges" on page 48.)
•Erase Background: Prints an image with no background. (See
"Erasing background images" on page 48.)
•Margin Shift: Creates a binding edge for the document. (See
"Shifting margins" on page 48.)
COPYING ORIGINALS
This is the normal and usual procedure for copying your originals.
1. Press Copy from the Main screen.
2. Place originals, face up, in the DADF, or you can use the scanner glass
with a single original document face down.
3. Adjust the settings for each copy such as Original Size, Reduce/
Enlarge, Duplex and more. (See "Changing the size of originals" on
page 42., see "Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)" on page 43.)
4. Select the tray by pressing the appropriate tray on screen.
5. Enter the number of copies using the number keypad, if necessary.
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
CHANGING THE SETTINGS FOR EACH COPY
On the Basic tab of the Copy screen, you can select copy features before
starting to copy.
Changing the size of originals
Press the Basic tab > Original Size, then use left/right arrows to set the
original size.
Press more to see the detail values.
•Custom: Selects the scanning area of the original. Press the
cardinal point arrows to set the size.
•Auto: Automatically detects the size of originals, but this option
supports only when originals are Legal, Letter, or A5 sized. If the
originals is mixed-sized, then the machine detects the largest original
size and select the largest-sized paper in the tray.
•Mixed Size (Letter & Legal): Allows for the use of both of Letter and
Legal sized papers together, and the machine uses the proper-sized
paper from several trays. For example, if the originals are total 3
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy more than
two copies, the message Another Page? appears after the first page
copied. At this time, if you select No, the machine starts copying the
rest of your originals and sorts the copied papers in order. Because
the default value of theOutput option is Collated.
To cancel the current copy job, press Stop on the control panel. Or
you can delete the current and pending job using Job Status on the
control panel. Select the job you want to cancel and press Delete.
The Basic tab setting is only for each copy. That means that the
setting does not apply to the next copy job. After finishing the current
copy job, the machine automatically restores the default settings after
certain time. Or the machine resume to default setting when you press
the Clear All button on the control panel or when you press other
menu such as fax or else except the Job Status screen.
The default copy setting can be changed in Admin Setting. (See
"General settings" on page 84.)
43 _Copying
pages, 1st page is the letter-sized paper, 2nd page is the legal-sized
paper, and 3rd page is the letter-sized paper, then the machine
prints the output first letter, legal, and letter in order from several
trays.
• Other preset values: Allows user to easily select commonly used
values.
Reducing or enlarging copies
Press the Basic tab > Reduce/Enlarge, then use left/right arrows to reduce
or enlarge an image on the paper.
Press more to see the values.
•Original(100%): Prints texts or images the same size as originals.
•Auto Fit: Reduces or enlarges the original based on the size of the
output paper.
• Other preset values: Allows you to easily select commonly used
values.
Copying on both sides of originals (Duplex)
Press the Basic tab > Duplex, then use left/right arrows to select Duplex
value.
Press more to see the detail values.
•1 -> 1 Sided: Scans one side of an original and prints on one side of
the paper, this function produces exactly the same print out from
originals.
•1 -> 2 Sided: Scans one side of originals and prints them on both
sides of the paper.
•1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans one side of the originals and
prints on both sides of the paper, but the information on the back
side of the print out is rotated 180°.
•2 -> 1 Sided: Scans both sides of the originals and prints each of
one on a separate sheet.
•2 -> 2 Sided: Scans both sides of the original and prints on both
sides of the paper. This function produces exactly the same print out
from the originals.
•2 -> 1 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans both sides of the original and
prints each one on a separate sheet, but the information on the back
side of the printout is rotated 180°.
•Reverse 1 ->2 Sided: Scans originals and prints them on both sides
of a paper. But the machine reverses the print out order of the
originals. The machine prints the second original first, which means
the firstly input original is printed on the back side of a paper. For
instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers, every even
numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of a
paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed on
the back side of a paper.
•Reverse 1 -> 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: Scans originals and prints
them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print
out order of the originals. The machine prints the second original
first, which means the firstly input original is printed on the back side
of a paper. For instance, if you print 6 sheet of original papers, every
even numbered pages of originals will be printed on the front side of
a paper, and every odd numbered pages of originals will be printed
on the back side of a paper. The information on the back side of the
print out is rotated 180°.
The Custom option is different depending on where the originals is
placed. In the DADF, 25~200% adjustment is possible. And in the
scanner glass, 25~400% adjustment is possible.
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides
of originals, the message Another Page? appears after the first page
copied. At this time, load the original's the other side facing down and
press Yes, then the machine starts scanning the second page of your
original.
Copying_44
•Reverse 2 -> 2 Sided: Scans the both sides of originals and prints
them on both sides of a paper. But the machine reverses the print
out order of the originals. The machine prints the back sides of
originals first, which means the front sides of originals is printed on
the back side of a paper.
Deciding the form of copy output (Collated / Staple)
Press the Basic tab > Output, then use left/right arrows to select Collated
or Stapled. This feature is supported only when the original is on the DADF.
Press more to see the values.
•Collated: Prints output in sets to match the sequence of originals.
•Uncollated: Prints output sorted into stacks of individual pages.
•Staple, Portrait: Adds a single staple to all of your portrait-oriented
output.
•Staple, Landscape: Adds a single staple to all of your landscape-
oriented output.
Selecting the type of originals
Press the Basic tab and select an appropriate original type.
•Text: Use for originals containing mostly text.
•Text/Photo: Use for originals with mixed text and photographs.
•Photo: Use when originals are photographs.
Changing the darkness
This defines the degree of darkness. Use left/right arrows to change the
level of light/dark in the printouts.
USING SPECIAL COPY FEATURES
On the Advanced tab or the Image tab of the Copy screen, you can select
specific copy features.
Merging multiple jobs as a single copy
This feature allows you to merge multiple copy jobs into a single copy. For
example, if you need to use the DADF and the scanner glass for a
copy job, you can use this feature. In the picture below, each number
means each segment order.
1. Press Copy from the Main screen.
2. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
3. Press the Advanced tab > Job Build.
4. Press On to enable job build function.
If you want to copy originals on the scanner glass and copy both sides
of originals, the message Another Page? appears after the first page
copied. At this time, load the original's the other side facing down and
press Yes, then the machine starts scanning the second page of your
original.
The Staple feature is available with an optional stacker & stapler. (See
"Stacker & Stapler (Finisher)" on page 121.)
① Segment 1 from the DADF.
② Segment 2 from the scanner
glass.
③ Segment 3 from the DADF.
④ Segment 4 from the scanner
glass.
⑤ Segment 5 from the DADF.
When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the segment
list will be deleted to prevent accessing by the unexpected users.
䓄
䓅
䓆
䓈
䓇
45 _Copying
•Off: Disables Job Build feature.
•On: Enables Job Build feature.
•Display Between Segments: After executing a segment, the job is
paused with this screen. is displayed Then the user can select to
keep copying or stop.
•Print: Prints the sample page(s) of a segment to confirm the
contents.
•Delete: Deletes a segment.
•Delete All: Deletes all segments.
•Print All: Prints all segments.
•Add Segment: Adds a new segment.
•Cancel: Removes all segments in the list, and cancels the job.
5. Press Add Segment.
6. Place originals, face up, in the DADF, or you can use the scanner glass
with a single original document face down.
7. Press Start on the control panel.
Then the machine starts scanning.
8. Repeat step 5 to step 7.
9. After adding segments, press Print All.
ID card copying
The machine prints one side of the original on the upper half of the paper
and the other side on the lower half without reducing the size of the original.
This feature is helpful for copying a small-sized item, such as a business
card.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.
1. Place the front side of an original facing down on the scanner glass
where arrows indicate as shown, and close the scanner lid.
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy.
5. Press Start on the control panel.
Then the machine starts scanning the front side.
6. Turn the original over and place it on the scanner glass, where arrows
indicate as shown. Then, close the scanner lid.
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Copying ID with the manual ID copy option
If you want to copy several ID cards on a paper, or adjust the copying position
of the page, follow the next steps.
Next steps are the procedure when you copy two people's driver's license
cards (100mm X 80mm) in one page.
1 Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2 Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3 Press the Setup tab > Copy Setup > Manual ID Copy Setup.
4 Press the number from the template list table.
5 Press Edit Template.
6 Selec the appropriate option values and press OK.
•Template Name: Enter the template name.
•Scan Position: Select the position for scanning. You should select the
largest scanning position out of the originals.
LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-000mm, RIGHT, BOTTOM: X-110mm/Y-
090mm
•Number of Images: Select how many images are on a page. (select
number 4.)
As long as the hard drive capacity of your device remains, you can add
segments without any restriction.
The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this feature.
• If the original is larger than the printable area, some portions may
not be printed.
• If this option is grayed out, select the Duplex option to 1 -> 1
Sided, the Output option to Collated.
Copying_46
•Image Position: Select the position of a page which images are on. If
you choose to copy four images, you have to select four positions
here.
-First Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-020mm, RIGHT,
BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-100mm
-Second Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-020mm, RIGHT,
BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-100mm
-Third Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-000mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,
BOTTOM: X-100mm/Y-230mm
-Forth Image Position: LEFT, TOP : X-105mm/Y-150mm, RIGHT,
BOTTOM: X-205mm/Y-230mm
7 Press OK, the template you have saved will be shown in the template
list table.
8 Press and select Copy.
9 Press the Advanced tab > ID Copy > Manual ID Copy >.
10 Press the template you have saved from the template list.
11 Press the Start button on the control panel. now follow the instruction
on display to finish the ID copy for four images
2-up or 4-up copying (N-up)
The machine reduces the size of the original images and prints 2 or 4 pages
onto one sheet of paper.
2 or 4-up copying is available only when you load originals into the DADF.
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > N-Up.
5. Select Off, 2Up, or 4Up.
•Off: Copies an original onto one sheet of paper.
•2Up: Copies two separate originals onto one page.
•4Up: Copies four separate originals onto one page.
6. Press Start on the control panel.
Poster copying
Your original will be divided into 9 portions. You can paste the printed pages
together to make one poster-sized document. This copy feature is available
only when you place originals on the scanner glass. Each portion is
scanned and printed on by one in the following order.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.
1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading
originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Poster Copy.
5. Press On to activate this feature.
6. Press OK.
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Clone copying
The machine prints multiple original images on a single page. The number
of images is automatically determined by the original image and the paper
size.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.
1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading
originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
You cannot adjust the copy size using the Reduce/Enlarge for the N-
Up feature.
1 2
1 2
3 4
This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab are
selected as below;
-Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided
-Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)
-Paper Supply to Tray.
Your original is divided into 9 portions. Each portion is scanned and
printed one by one in the following order:
47 _Copying
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Clone Copy.
5. Press On to activate this feature.
6. Press OK.
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Book copying
Use this feature to copy a book. If the book is too thick, lift the scanner lid
until its hinges are engaged by the stopper and then close the scanner lid. If
the book or magazine is thicker than 30 mm(1.18 inches), start copying with
the scanner lid open.
This copy feature is available only when you place originals on the scanner
glass.
1. Place the originals face down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading
originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Press the Advanced tab > Book Copy.
4. Select the binding option.
•Off: Disables this feature.
•Left Page: Prints left page of the book.
•Right Page: Prints right page of the book.
•Both Page: Prints both facing pages of the book.
5. Press OK.
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Booklet copying
The machine automatically prints on one or both sides of the paper,
which are then folded to produce a booklet with all of the pages in
the correct sequence.
The machine will also reduce and correctly adjust the position of each
image to fit on the selected paper.
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Booklet.
5. Press On to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each
option.
•1 Sided Original: Copies on one side of the paper.
•2 Sided Original: Copies on both sides of the paper.
6. Press OK.
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Cover copying
The machine automatically adds covers to your copied set using stock taken
from a different tray. Covers must be the same size and orientation as the
main body of the job.
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Covers.
5. Press On to use this feature, and select detailed settings for each
option.
•Position: Selects whether the cover will be placed at the front, back,
or both.
•Cover Sheet: Selects whether the cover will be 1 sided, 2 sided, or
blank paper.
•Paper Source: Select the paper tray, where the cover sheet is
loaded.
6. Press OK.
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Transparency copying
When you prepare transparencies for presentations, use this feature to copy
the information.
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Load the right-sized transparencies into the tray you have set.
3. Set the paper type to Transparency.
4. Press Copy from the Main screen.
5. Press the Advanced tab > Transparencies.
6. Select Transparencies option.
•No Separator: Does not place separator sheets between
transparencies.
•Blank Sheet: Places a blank sheet between transparencies.
•Printed Sheet: Places the same image on the divider sheets as
printed on the transparency.
7. Select media sources, in case you selected either Blank Sheet or
Printed Sheet.
This feature is available only when the options in the Basic tab are
selected as below;
-Duplex to 1 -> 1 Sided
-Reduce/Enlarge to Original(100%)
-Paper Supply to Tray.
To remove shadows of a book edge, press the Image tab > Erase
Edge > Book Center and Edges Erase.
This feature is possible only with A4, Letter, Legal, Folio, Oficio, JIS
B5, ISO B5, Executive, A5 and Statement sized paper.
Once you have set the Paper Supply option to Auto, you cannot use
this feature.
Before you start this special copy job, set the tray's Paper Types and
Paper Size to Transparency.(See "Setting the paper size and type" on
page 40.)
Copying_48
8. Press OK.
9. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Erasing edges
You can copy the original without any edges or margins.
1. Place a single original face down on the scanner glass. Or load the
originals face up in the DADF. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Press the Image tab > Erase Edge.
4. Select the appropriate option.
•Off: Disables this feature.
•Border Erase: Erases equal amounts on all edges of the copies.
•Small Original Erase: Erases 0.25" (6mm) from the edge of the
copies. The original must be placed on the scanner glass to use this
feature.
•Hole Punch Erase: Erases hole punch marks from the left edge of
the copies.
•Book Center and Edges Erase: Erases shadows of a binding or
book edge from the center and side edges of the copies. This feature
only applies when you do copying a book. (See "Book copying" on
page 47.)
5. Press OK.
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Erasing background images
This feature is helpful when copying originals containing color in the
background, as in newspapers or catalogs.
1. Load the originals, face up, in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass.
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Press the Image tab > Erase Background.
4. Select the appropriate option.
•Off: Disables this feature.
•Auto: Optimizes the background.
•Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background
is.
•Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.
5. Press OK.
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Shifting margins
You can secure a room for binding by shifting the margin of a page.
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Press the Image tab > Margin Shift
4. Select Margin Shift option.
•Off: Disables this feature.
•Auto Center: Adjusts centers of the paper copy automatically. The
original must be loaded on the scanner glass to use this feature. This
option supports only the original is loaded on the scanner glass.
•Custom Margin: Adjusts the margin of the left and right, top and
bottom as you want using arrows. This option supports both on the
scanner glass or in DADF.
5. Press OK.
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Watermark copying
You can copy the original with a watermark. For example, you can use it
when you want to have large gray letters such as Top Secret or
Confidential printed diagonally across the first page or all pages of the
copy.
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > WaterMark.
5. Select WaterMark option.
•Off: Disables this feature.
•Top Secret: Prints the original with Top Secret text.
•Confidential: Prints the original with Confidential text.
•Urgent: Prints the original with Urgent text.
•Draft: Prints the original with Draft text.
•Custom: The machine prints the original with the customized
text.
6. Select 1st Page only, Size, Position, Darkness of options.
7. Press OK.
8. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
If you have set the Book Copy option to Off, you cannot use Book
Center and Edges Erase.
49 _Copying
Overlay copying
If you scan and store the data such as format, you can copy the
original with the previously stored data.
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Overlay.
5. Press List.
6. Select a file name.
7. Select a overlay option.
•New: Makes the new overlay. When the file name pops up, enter the
file name.
•Detail: Shows information of the selected overlay.
•Edit: Modifies the name of the selected overlay.
•Delete: Deletes the selected overlay.
•Apply: Prints the originals with the selected overlay.
•Print: Prints the selected overlay.
•Cancel: Cancels overlay options you have selected.
8. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
If you have selected option New in step 7, the machine starts storing the
new overlay by pressing the Start button.
Auto crop copying
The machine prints only the image of an original after cropping the blank
parts like the margin.
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or place a single original face
down on the scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.)
2. Press Copy from the Main screen.
3. Select the tray in Paper Supply.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Auto Crop.
5. Press On to activate this feature.
6. Press OK.
7. Press Start on the control panel to begin copying.
Scanning_50
scanning
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital files that can be stored on your computer. Then you can fax
or email the files, upload them to your website, or use them to create projects that you can print.
This chapter gives you information about the scanning method and the different ways to send the scanned file to the destination.
This chapter includes
• Scanning basics
• Understanding the Scan screen
• Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)
• Using Samsung Scan Manager
• Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)
• Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)
• Changing the scan feature settings
SCANNING BASICS
Scanning with your machine lets you turn hard copy originals into digital
files.
There are two ways to scan originals, one is using the USB cable to directly
connect the machine with your computer, and the other is using the network
scan feature which scans and sends the document to a specific destination
via the network.
• Samsung Scan Manager: You just walk to the machine with the
originals and scan them from the control panel. Then, the scanned data
will be stored in the connected computers My Documents folder. When
you install all the softwares in the supplied CD, the Samsung Scan
Manager is also automatically installed on your computer. This feature
can be used via the local connection or the network connection. (See
"Using Samsung Scan Manager" on page 55.)
•TWAIN:TWAIN is the one of preset imaging applications. Scanning an
image launches the selected application, enabling you to control the
scanning process. See Software section. This feature can be used via
the local connection or the network connection. See Software section.
• Samsung SmarThru Office: This feature is the accompanying
software for your machine. You can use this program to scan images or
documents, and this feature can be used via the local connection or the
network connection. See Software section.
•WIA:WIA stands for Windows Images Acquisition. To use this feature
your computer must be connected directly to the machine with a USB
cable. See Software section.
•Email:You can send the scanned image as an attachment to an email.
(See "Scanning originals and sending through email (Scan to Email)" on
page 52.)
•FTP:You can scan an image and upload it to an FTP server. (See
"Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)" on
page 56.)
•SMB:You can scan an image and send it to a shared folder on an SMB
server. (See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to
Server)" on page 56.)
UNDERSTANDING THE SCAN SCREEN
To use the scanning feature, press Scan on the Main screen. If the screen
displays an other menu, press ( ) to go to the Main screen.
Press Scan to Email, Scan to PC or Scan to Server.
•Scan to Email: Scans and sends the scanned output to the
destination by email. (See "Scanning originals and sending through
email (Scan to Email)" on page 52.)
•Scan to PC: Scans and sends the scanned output to the destination
with the Samsung Scan Manager program. (See "Using Samsung
Scan Manager" on page 55.)
•Scan to Server: Scans and sends the scanned output to the
destination with SMB and FTP. (See "Scanning originals and
sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to Server)" on page 56.)
The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon various
factors, including computer speed, available disk space, memory, the
size of the image being scanned, and bit depth settings. Thus,
depending on your system and what you are scanning, you may not
be able to scan at certain resolutions, especially using enhanced
resolution.
If the message asking Auth. ID and Password, it means the network
administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru™ Web
Service.(See "Security" on page 88.)
51 _Scanning
Basic tab
This section explains the Basic tab of Scan to Email and Scan to Server,
and Scan to PC's basic screen.
Scan to Email
•From: Sender's email address.
•To/Cc/Bcc: Recipients' addresses. Cc is for copies to an additional
recipient and Bcc is for the same as Cc but without their name be
displayed.
•Subject/Message: Subject and message of the email.
•Remove All: Erases everything in the input area.
•Address: Inputs the recipient's address just by pressing stored
addresses. You can store frequently used email addresses from your
computer using the SyncThru™ Web Service. (See "Storing email
addresses" on page 54.)
•Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the
paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of
paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).
•Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.
•Saving to box: Sets the machine to save the originals to the
document box for later use.
•Back: Returns to the previous screen. If the network authentication
is enabled, the log off confirmation message popes up and closes
Scan to Email.
Scan to PC
If the authentication for network appears, you have to enter user name
and password to enter the Scan to PC screen.
•No.: Lists the number in order for application programs.
•Application: Shows the available application programs from your
computer.
•Select: Moves to the application program you have selected.
•Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the
paper (1-Sided), both sides of the paper (2-Sided), or both sides of
paper but the back side is rotated 180 degrees (2-Sided, Rotate Side
2).
•Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.
•Back: Returns to the previous screen. If network authentication is
enabled, the log off confirmation message pops-up and closes Scan
to PC.
Scan to Server
•SMB: Sends the scanned file to SMB. Press SMB for that option.
•FTP: Sends the scanned file to FTP. Press FTP for that option.
•No.: Index number which you entered in SyncThru™ Web Service.
(See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to
Server)" on page 56.)
•Server: Alias name which you entered in SyncThru™ Web Service.
(See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP (Scan to
Server)" on page 56.)
•Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the
paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of
paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).
•Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.
•Saving to box: Sets the machine to save the originals to the
document box for later use.
•Back: Returns to the previous screen.
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box chapter. (See "Using document box" on page 77.)
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box chapter. (See "Using document box" on page 77.)
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box chapter. (See "Using document box" on page 77.)
Scanning_52
Advanced tab
•Job Build: Allows you to scan several originals, and then send them
in a single email or send them to a server(s) at once. (See "Scanning
and sending multiple documents in a single email" on page 53. or
See "Scanning and sending multiple documents to SMB/FTP
server(s) at once" on page 56.)
•Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (See
"Original Size" on page 57.)
•Back: Returns to the previous screen.
Image tab
•Original Type: Selects whether the original is text or photo. (See
"Original Type" on page 58.)
•Color Mode: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the
original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.
(See "Color Mode" on page 58.)
•Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use
left/right arrow to adjust the values. (See "Darkness" on page 58.)
•Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns. (See
"Erase Background" on page 58.)
•Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (See "Scan to
Edge" on page 58.)
•Back: Returns to the previous screen.
Output tab
•Quality: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output. (See
"Quality" on page 58.)
•File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See "File
Format" on page 59.)
•Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as file
format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each
specific purpose. (See "Scan Preset" on page 59.)
•Back: Returns to the previous screen.
SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING
THROUGH EMAIL (SCAN TO EMAIL)
You can scan the originals and email the scanned image to several
destinations from the machine by email.
Sending a scanned image to several destinations as
an email attachment
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass for one sheet of paper.
2. Press Scan from the Main screen.
3. Press Scan to Email.
4. Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See
"Advanced tab" on page 52.)
5. Press the Basic tab to enter the email address.
If the authentication message shows, enter User Name and
Password. This message shows only when the network
administrator has set the authentication in SyncThru™ Web
Service. (See "Security" on page 88.)
53 _Scanning
•From: Sender's address. Touch From and then the keyboard pops
up on the screen. Use the pop up keyboard to enter your email
addresses. Or you can use Local and Global to enter the addresses
easily. (See "Global" on page 54.)
•To/Cc/Bcc: Recipient's email address manually with the pop up
keyboard, or by pressing Local or Global. Local or Global
addresses are pre-loaded address lists from your computer or the
LDAP server which is configured at Web UI. (See "Global" on
page 54.)
•Subject: Title of email.
•Message: Enters the text which will be as the contents of the email.
The maximum size is 1KB.
6. Set the scan quality by Duplex and Resolution.
•Duplex: Sets this option for originals that are printed on one side
only, or on both sides.
•Resolution: Sets the scanning resolution by pressing left/right
arrows.
7. Press the Start button to scan and send the file.
Scanning and sending multiple documents in a
single email
You can make multiple scanning jobs into a single file. And, therefore, you
can send the document with a single email.
1. Press Scan from the Main screen.
2. Press Scan to Email.
3. Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See
"Advanced tab" on page 52.)
4. Press the Advanced tab > Job Build.
5. Press On to enable the job build function.
•Off: Disables Job Build feature.
•On: Enables Job Build feature.
•Display Between Segments: After executing a segment, the job is
paused with this screen is displayed. Then the user can select to
keep sending email or stop.
•Delete: Deletes a segment.
•Delete All: Deletes all segments.
•Send All: Prints all segments.
•Add Segment: Adds a new segment.
•Cancel: Remove all segments in the list, and cancel the job.
6. Press Add Segment.
7. Place the originals face up in the DADF or you can use the scanner
glass for one sheet of paper.
8. Press Start to start the scanning job.
9. Repeat step 6 to step 8.
10. After adding segments, press Send All.
Setting up an email account
To scan and send an image as an email attachment, you need to set up
network parameters using SyncThru™ Web Service.
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. ( See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
5. Click Settings > Network Settings > Outgoing Mail Server(SMTP).
6. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.
7. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 25.
8. Check the box next to SMTP Requires Authentication to require
authentication.
9. Enter the SMTP server login name and password.
10. Click Apply.
To delete previously entered contents, press Remove All.
While the machine is sending an email, you cannot perform a copy
job or send a fax.
When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the segment
list will be deleted to prevent accessing of the unexpected users.
As long as the hard drive capacity of your device remains, you can add
segments without any restriction.
If the authentication method of SMTP server is POP3beforeSMTP,
check the box next to SMTP Requires POP3 Before SMTP
Authentication.
a. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
b. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default port
number is 25.
If SMTP server requires SSL/TLS connection, enable Secure E-mail
Connection with SSL/TLS
Scanning_54
Storing email addresses
There are two kinds of email addresses - Local on your machine's memory
and Global on the LDAP server - which differ depending on where they are
stored. Local is that email addresses are stored in the machine's memory,
and Global is that email addresses are stored in the certain (LDAP) server.
Through the SyncThru™ Web Service, you can easily enter and store
email addresses from your computer.
Individual
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4. Click Address Book.
5. Click Add.
6. When the Add E-Mail screen appears, select the Speed No. from 1
to 500, enter User Name and E-mail Address.
7. Click Apply.
8. Check if the emails are correctly stored and listed on your machine
by pressing Local > the Individual tab.
Group
1. Access to the SyncThru™ Web Service from your computer.
2. Make sure you have configured Individual Address Book.
3. Click Address Book > E-mail Groups.
4. Click Add Group.
5. Enter Group Name and Speed No..
6. Add Individual addresses to the e-mail group.
7. Click Apply.
8. Check if the email addresses are correctly stored and listed on your
machine by pressing Group.
Global
Email addresses which are stored in Global in your machine are
processed by the LDAP server.
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4. Log in to the web site as an administrator. (See "Managing your
machine from the website" on page 99.)
5. Click Security > Network Security > External Authentication
Server > LDAP Server.
6. Enter LDAP server and Port.
7. Enter optional information.
8. Click Apply.
Entering email addresses by the address book
Once you have stored the frequently used addresses into the address book,
you can simply enter email addresses.
1. Press Local or Global from the Basic tab of Scan to Email.
The search window shows.
2. Press the initial alphabet key of the address you are looking for. Or
press Search to specify the search criteria.
When the search is completed, the screen displays the search results.
3. Press From and enter your email address and press OK.
4. Select the address you want in the right-hand pane, and the press To,
Cc or Bcc in the left-hand pane.
5. Press Apply. Keep selecting addresses as many as you want.
6. Press OK.
The LDAP server administrator must store the email address data.
The method of storing is varies depending on the server and the
operating systems.
55 _Scanning
Entering email addresses by the keyboard
When you press the input field in the From, To, Cc, or message input field,
the keyboard shows on the display screen.
The following explanation is the example that you are entering
"abcdefg@abc.com".
1. Press From in the Basic tab of the Scan to Email.
2. Press a, b, c, d, e, f, g.
3. Press @.
4. Press a, b, c.
5. Press . and press c, o, m.
6. Press OK after finishing all the contents.
USING SAMSUNG SCAN MANAGER
If you have installed the printer driver, Samsung Scan Manager program
has installed too. Start Samsung Scan Manager program to find out about
this program information and the installed scan driver's condition. Through
this program, you can change scan settings and add or delete the folders
where scanned documents are saved in your computer.
1. From the
Start
menu, click Control Panel > Samsung Scan Manager.
2. Select the appropriate machine from the Samsung Scan Manager
window.
3. Press Properties.
4. The Set Scan Button tab allows you to change the saving destination
and scan settings, add or delete application program, and format files.
You can change the scanning machine by using the Change Port tab.
(Local or Network)
5. When setting is done, press OK.
Set Scan Button tab
Scan Destination
•Available Destination List: Shows the list of applications currently
linked to scanned images in the PC’s registry. Select the program
you want to use and click the right arrow and add to Front Panel
Destination List.
•Front Panel Destination List: Shows the list of applications to open
scanned image.
•Add Application: Allows you to add application you want to use to
Available Destination List.
•Remove Application: Allows you to remove an item added by the
user in the Available Destination List.
•File Format: Allows you to select the form of scanned data to be
saved. You can choose among BMP, JPEG, PDF, and TIFF.
Scan Property
•Computer ID: Shows the ID of your computer.
•Save Location: Allows you to choose the location of the default
saving folder.
•Resolution: Allows you to choose the scan resolution.
•Scan Color: Allows you to choose the scan color.
•Scan Size: Allows you to choose the scan size.
•ADF Duplex: Automatically scans both sides. If your model does not
support this option, it will be grayed out.
•Show Preview: Checking this box allows you to preview applied
scan options. You can modify the options before scanning.
•Default: Allows you to go back to default options.
to enter contents in other fields, press on the
keyboard.
The Samsung Scan Manager program can only be used in the
Window and Macintosh system. If you use the Macintosh, see
Software section.
The scan data can be encrypted to protect the contents from
unauthorized access. You can enable the secured scan feature from
the SyncThru™ Web Service. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web
Service as an administrator. (See "Managing your machine from the
website" on page 99.) And click Setting > Machine Settings > Scan
> Scan Security > PC Scan Security.
You can open Samsung Scan Manager by right clicking the
Smart Panel icon in the Windows task bar and seleting Scan
Manager.
Scanning_56
Change Port tab
Local Scanner
Select when your machine is connected via USB or LPT port.
Network Scanner
Select when your machine is connected via network port.
•Auto detection on the network: Automatically detects your
machine.
•IP address: Enter in your machine’s IP address to detect your
machine.
SCANNING ORIGINALS AND SENDING VIA SMB/
FTP (SCAN TO SERVER)
You can scan an image and send it to a server via the SMB or FTP.
Preparation for scanning to SMB/FTP
Select the folder and share it with the machine in order to receive the
scanned file.
1. Turn your networked computer on and open the web browser.
2. Enter your machine's IP address as the URL in a browser.
3. Click Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service.
4. Click Address Book.
5. Click Add.
6. Enter a name and speed number.
7. Check Add SMB.
8. Enter the server address in dotted decimal notation or a host name.
9. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535. The default port number
is 139.
10. If you want to allow the unauthorized person’s access to SMB server,
check Anonymous. By default, this is unchecked.
11. Enter the login name and password.
12. Enter the domain name of the SMB server.
13. Enter the path of shared folder in the SMB server for storing the scanned
images.
14. Configure Scan folder creating policy, Filing Policy and File Name.
15. Click Apply.
Scanning and sending to SMB/FTP server
1. Press Scan from the Main screen.
2. Press Scan to Server.
3. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can place a single
original document face down on the scanner glass.
4. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.
5. Select Duplex and Resolution in the Basic tab.
6. Press Scan to Server to show the SMB server list you entered in the
SyncThru™ Web Service.
7. Select the destination SMB server.
8. Press Start on the control panel.
The machine begins scanning and then sends the scanned image to the
specified server.
Scanning and sending multiple documents to SMB/
FTP server(s) at once
You can make multiple scanning jobs into a single file. And, therefore, you
can send the document with a single access to the server.
1. Press Scan from the Main screen.
2. Press Scan to Server.
3. Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See
"Advanced tab" on page 52.)
4. Press the Advanced tab > Job Build.
The next steps are for SMB server setting using SyncThru™ Web
Service, and the setting for FTP server is the same as SMB. Apply the
same steps for setting up the FTP server.
If the authentication message shows, enter User Name and Password.
This message shows only when the network administrator has set the
authentication in SyncThru™ Web Service. (See "Managing your
machine from the website" on page 99.)
You can select up to five destinations using both of SMB or FTP
servers.
When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the segment
list will be deleted to prevent accessing of the unexpected users.
57 _Scanning
5. Press On to enable job build function.
•Off: Disables Job Build feature.
•On: Enables Job Build feature.
•Display Between Segments: After executing a segment, the job is
paused with this screen is displayed. Then the user can select to
keep sending email or stop.
•Delete: Deletes a segment.
•Delete All: Deletes all segments.
•Send All: Prints all segments.
•Add Segment: Adds a new segment.
•Cancel: Remove all segments in the list, and cancel the job.
6. Press Add Segment.
7. Place the originals face up in the DADF or you can use the scanner
glass for one sheet of paper.
8. Press Start to start the scanning job.
9. Repeat step 6 to step 8.
10. After adding segments, press Send All.
CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS
This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,
such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and
more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but after
that period, the options will be reset to default values.
Duplex
This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned
are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only one side of
the paper or both sides of the paper.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Basic tab >
Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values.
•1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.
•2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
•2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both sides.
But the back is rotated 180 degrees.
Resolution
You can adjust document resolution.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Basic tab >
Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you
select the clear result you get. But the scanning time may take longer.
100, 200, 300 dpi resolution is available only when Color Mode is set to
Color or Gray. The following table shows detailed information feature,
resolution and file format options.
Original Size
You can specify the scanning area on the originals by selecting the pre-
defined size, or putting in the margin value or
Auto
. If you set this option to
Auto
, the machine senses and determines the size of the original.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Advanced tab >
Original Size. Use up/down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the
appropriate option and press OK.
As long as space remains on your device's hard drive, you can add
segments without any restriction.
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load the
originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not detect the
original on DADF, automatically changes the option to 1 Sided.
FEATURE RESOLUTION (DPI) FILE FORMAT
Scan to Email 100, 200, 300, 400,
600 PDF, Single-Page TIFF,
Multi-Page TIFF, JPEG
Scan to PC 100, 200, 300, 400,
600 PDF, TIFF, JPEG
Scan to Server 100, 200, 300, 400,
600 PDF, Single-Page TIFF,
Multi-Page TIFF, JPEG
Scanning_58
Original Type
You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a
document being scanned.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >
Original Type. Select the appropriate option and press OK.
•Text: For originals that have text or line art.
•Text/Photo: For originals that have both text and photographs
together.
•Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.
Color Mode
Use this option to scan the original in
Mono
, Gray or
Color
mode.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >
Color
Mode
. Select the appropriate option and press OK.
•
Color
: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for
each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.
•Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per pixel.
•
Mono
: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.
Darkness
You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your
original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the output
darker.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >
Darkness. Press right arrow to enhance the darkness degree then, press
OK.
Erase Background
You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning
colored paper or newspaper originals.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab >
Erase
Background
. Select the appropriate option and press OK.
•Off: Disables this feature.
•Auto: Optimizes the background.
•Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background
is.
•Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.
Scan to Edge
You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the
machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin, especially
when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray. But if you
scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the machine does not
need to exclude the edges from the originals.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Image tab > Scan
to Edge. Select
On
and press OK.
Quality
You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher quality
you select a larger file size you get.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab >
Quality.
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected
for Color Mode.
When you set Color Mode to Mono, the Quality option is grayed out.
59 _Scanning
File Format
You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab > File
Format.
•PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.
You can add a Digital Signature to the PDF with the certification. To
add the Digital Signature, you have to create the certification from
the SyncThru™ Web Service. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web
Service as an administrator. (See "Managing your machine from the
website" on page 99.) And click Setting > Machine Settings > Scan
> Scan Security > Digital Signature in PDF.The Digital Signature
can be used in the Scan to Server feature.
You also can create a PDF Encryption that is encrypted to protect
the contents from unauthorized access. You can set the encryption
level, password, and access permission such as reading, printing, or
modifying, etc. The PDF Encryption can be used in the Scan to
Server feature. (See "PDF Encryption" on page 59.)
•Single-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.
•Multi-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), and several originals are scanned as several file.
•JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.
•XPS: Scans original in XPS format.
PDF Encryption
To encrypt your PDF files, you need to set up parameters for the encryption
level, password, and access permission, etc.
1. Press Scan > Scan to Server > the Output tab > File Format > PDF.
2. Press PDF Encryption.
3. Press On.
4. Select an encryption level.
•Low (RC4, 40 bits): Recommended for Acrobat 3.0 or later version.
•High (RC4, 128 bits): Recommended for Acrobat 5.0 or later
version.
•High (AES, 128 bits): Recommended for Acrobat 7.0 or later
version.
5. Enter the Owner Password to get a whole right about the PDF.
6. Enter the User Password to get an Access Permission set by the
Access Permission menu below.
7. Set the Access Permission in printing or modifying. This configuration
will affect the users accessed with the User Password.
8. Check Extract text and graphics to give users permission to extract
text or graphics.
9. Press OK.
Scan Preset
This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.
Press Scan > Scan to Email (Or Scan to Server) > the Output tab > Scan
Preset.
•Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal quality
documents.
•High Quality Printing: Set this option for high quality output with the
largest file size.
•Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file
size of the output.
•OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect
the highest quality images.
•Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file
size of output is small.
•Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.
• The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been
selected for Color Mode.
• The file format XPS cannot be showed in the Scan to PC mode.
The PDF Encryption can be used in the Scan to Server feature.
Basic printing_60
basic printing
This chapter explains common printing tasks.
This chapter includes:
• Printing a document • Canceling a print job
PRINTING A DOCUMENT
Your machine allows you to print from various Windows, Macintosh, or
Linux applications. The exact steps for printing a document may vary
depending on the application you use.
For details about printing, see Software section.
CANCELING A PRINT JOB
If the print job is waiting in a print queue or print spooler, such as the printer
group in Windows, delete the job as follows:
1. Click the Windows Start menu.
2. For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Vista/2008, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound
> Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
3. For Windows 2000, XP, 2003, 2008 and Vista, double-click your
machine.
4. For Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008 R2, right click your printer
icon > context menus > See what’ s printing.
5. From the Document menu, select Cancel.
You can also cancel the current job by pressing Stop on the control panel.
You can also access this window by simply double-clicking the printer
icon at the bottom right corner of the Windows desktop.
61 _Faxing (Optional)
faxing (optional)
This chapter gives you information about using your machine as a fax machine.
This chapter includes:
• Preparing to fax
• Understanding the Fax screen
• Sending a fax
• Receiving a fax
• Adjusting the document settings
• Setting up a fax phonebook
• Using the polling option
• Using Mailbox
• Printing a report after sending a fax
• Sending a fax in toll save time
• Adding documents to a reserved delay fax job
• Forwarding a received fax to other destination
• Setting up the end Fax tone
• Sending a fax from a Computer
PREPARING TO FAX
Before you send or receive a fax, you need to connect the supplied line cord
to the wall jack. Refer to the Quick Install Guide how to make a connection.
The method of making a telephone connection is varies from one country to
another.
UNDERSTANDING THE FAX SCREEN
To use the fax feature, press Fax on the Main screen. If the screen displays
an other menu, press ( ) to go to the Main screen.
Basic tab
•Fax number input area: Shows the recipient's fax number using the
number keypad on the control panel. If you configured the phone
book, press Individual or Group. (See "Setting up a fax
phonebook" on page 66.)
•Add No.: Lets you add more destinations.
•: Deletes the last digit entered.
•: Removes all digits of the selected entry.
•Remove: Removes the selected fax number entry.
•Remove All: Removes all the fax numbers in the input area.
•Address: Picks up the frequently used fax numbers directly from
your machine or from SyncThru™ Web Service. (See "Setting up a
fax phonebook using SyncThru™ Web Service" on page 67.)
• You cannot use this machine as a fax via the internet phone. For
more information ask the internet service provider.
• You may experience restrictions on color fax transmmission, slower
fax transmmission, poor fax quality and communication failures when
faxing over VoIP network. Contact you local network administrator or
Internet Service Provider for more details.
• To use advanced features of the fax, press Machine Setup on the
control panel and
Admin Setting
> Setup > Fax Setup. (See "Fax
Setup" on page 86.)
• We recommend you to use traditional analog phone services
(PSTN: public switched telephone network) when connecting
telephone lines to use Fax. If you use other Internet services (DSL,
ISDN, VolP), you can improve the connection quality by using the
Micro-filter. The Micro-filter eliminates unnecessary noise signals
and improves connection quality or Internet quality. Since the DSL
Micro-filter is not provided with the machine, contact your Internet
Service provider for use on DSL Micro-filter.
1Line port
2Micro filter
3DSL modem/Telephone line
If you want to add fax feature to the machine, check the option lists
(See "Fax option kit" on page 121.) and contact the purchasing point
to order. When you purchase a fax kit, install the kit by following the
steps described in the Fax Kit Setup Guide which is enclosed in the kit.
After installing the fax kit, set the machine to use this feature. (See
"Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit" on page 125.)
If the optional fax feature is not installed the fax icon will not appear on
the Main screen.
Faxing (Optional)_62
•Duplex: Selects whether the machine send faxes one side of the
original, both sides of the original.
•Resolution: Adjusts the resolution options.
•Saving to box: Sets the machine to save the originals to the
document box for later use.
Advanced tab
•Job Build: Allows you to send several fax jobs in a single fax
transmission. (See "Sending multiple faxes in a single
transmission" on page 64.).
•Original Size: Selects the size of the original document. Press OK to
update current setting.
•Delay Send: Sets the machine to send a fax at a later time without
your intervention. (See "Delaying a fax transmission" on page 63.)
•Priority Send: Sends an urgent fax before reserved operations.
(See "Sending a priority fax" on page 64.)
•Polling: Used when the receiver requests the document to be faxed
remotely at sender's absence or vice versa. In order to use the
polling function, the originals must be previously stored in the
machine. (See "Using the polling option" on page 67.)
•Mailbox: Used to store a received fax or originals in the machine
memory which are ready to be polled. You can use a mailbox on the
same machine you are using, or the one on a remote machine. Each
mailbox has a corresponding mailbox number, name and password.
(See "Using Mailbox" on page 68.)
•Back: Returns to the Basic tab.
Image tab
•Original Type: Enhances the fax quality based on the type of the
original document being scanned. (See "Original Type" on page 65.)
•Darkness: Adjusts the level of lightness or darkness of the fax. (See
"Darkness" on page 65.)
•Erase Background: Reduces dark backgrounds or paper patterns
as in newspaper originals. (See "Erase Background" on page 65.)
•Color Mode: Selects whether the user sends the fax in mono or
color. (See "Color Mode" on page 66.)
•Back: Returns to the Basic tab.
SENDING A FAX
This part explains how to send a fax, and the special methods of
transmission.
Setting the fax header
In some countries, you are required by law to indicate your fax number on
any fax you send.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Machine ID & Fax No.
4. Touch the input area to enter the machine name and your fax number.
5. Press OK.
Sending a fax
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF.
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.
4. Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.
5. When the cursor is blinking in the input line, enter the fax number using
the number keypad on the control panel. Or use Address on the right
side of the screen, if you have stored frequently used fax numbers.
For details about how to use the Document Box, refer to the
Document Box chapter. (See "Using document box" on page 77.)
When you place the originals, you can use either the DADF or the
scanner glass. (See "Loading originals" on page 33.) If the originals
are placed on both the DADF and the scanner glass, the machine will
read the originals on the DADF first, which has higher priority in
scanning.
If the originals are printed on both sides of the paper, select 2
Sided with left/right arrows in the Duplex feature.
63 _Faxing (Optional)
6. To add a number, press Add No..
7. Press Start on the control panel. The machine starts to scan and send a
fax to destinations.
Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Place the originals face up into the DADF.
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.
4. Select Duplex and Resolution options in the Basic tab.
5. Press On Hook Dial on the control panel.
6. Enter a fax number using the number keypad on the control panel.
• If the number is which you have dialed recently, press the Redial/
Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent fax numbers
and select a fax number.
7. Press Start when you hear a high-pitched fax signal from the remote fax
machine.
Automatic resending
When the number you have dialed is busy or there is no answer, the
machine automatically redials the number.
To change the time interval between redials and/or the number of redial
attempts, refer to the next following steps.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press Redial.
5. Select Redial Term and Redial Times.
6. Press OK.
Redialing the last number
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab.
3. Place the originals face up into the DADF.
4. Press the Redial/Pause button on the control panel to show ten recent
fax numbers.
5. Select a fax number in the list and press OK.
The machine automatically begins to send.
Delaying a fax transmission
You can set your machine to send a fax at a later time when you will not be
present.
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF.
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Delay Send.
5. Press On.
6. Enter Job Name using the keyboard on the display, select Start Time
with left/right arrows.
• If you do not enter Job Name, the machine assigns the job name as
'Fax Send Job xxx'. 'xxx' number are set in order.
• When you want to cancel a fax job, press Stop before the machine
start transmission. Or press the Job Status button, and select the
job you want to delete, press Delete.
• If you used the scanner glass, the machine shows the message
asking to place another page.
• While the machine is sending a fax, you can not send an email at
the same time. (See "Scanning originals and sending through
email (Scan to Email)" on page 52.)
Color faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually. (See
"Color Mode" on page 66.)
Faxing (Optional)_64
7. Press OK to start storing the scanned original data into memory.
Sending a priority fax
This function is used when a high priority fax need to be sent ahead of
reserved operations. The original is scanned into memory and immediately
transmitted when the current operation is finished. In addition, priority
transmission will interrupt a sending to multiple destinations between
stations (example, when the transmission to station A ends, before
transmission to station B begins) or between redial attempts.
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF.
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Priority Send.
5. Press On.
6. Press OK.
7. Press Start to start the urgent fax job.
Sending multiple faxes in a single transmission
You can send multiple fax jobs in a single transmission.
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
3. Press the Advanced tab > Job Build.
4. Press On to enable the job build function.
•Off: Disables Job Build feature.
•On: Enables Job Build feature.
•Display Between Segments: After executing a segment, the job is
paused with this screen is displayed. Then user can select to keep
sending fax or stop.
•Delete: Deletes a segment.
•Delete All: Deletes all segments.
•Send All: Prints all segments.
•Add Segment: Adds a new segment.
•Cancel: Remove all segments in the list, and cancel the job.
5. Press Add Segment.
6. Place the originals face up in the DADF.
7. Press Start to start scanning a segment for fax job.
8. Repeat step 5 to step 7.
9. After adding segments, press Send All.
RECEIVING A FAX
This section explains how to receive a fax, and the special receiving
methods available.
Changing the receive modes
Your machine is preset to Fax mode at the factory. When you receive a fax,
the machine answers the call on a specified number of rings and
automatically receives the fax. But if you want to change the Fax mode to
another mode, refer to next steps.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Fax Initial Setup > Receive Mode.
4. Select the option.
•Telephone: Receives a fax by pressing On Hook Dial and then
Start.
•Fax: Answers an incoming fax call and immediately goes into the fax
reception mode.
•Answering Machine/Fax: Is for when an answering machine
attached to your machine. Your machine answers an incoming call,
and the caller can leave a message on the answering machine. If the
fax machine senses a fax tone on the line, the machine automatically
switches to Fax mode to receive the fax.
5. Press OK.
Receiving manually in Telephone mode
You can receive a fax call by pressing On Hook Dial and then pressing
Start when you hear a fax tone from the remote machine. The machine
begins receiving a fax.
Receiving automatically in Answering Machine/Fax
mode
To use this mode, you must attache an answering machine to the EXT
socket on the back of your machine. (See "Rear view" on page 18.)
If the caller leaves a message, the answering machine stores the message
as it would normally. If your machine detects a fax tone on the line, it
automatically starts to receive the fax.
Start Time is the specific time you want the fax to be sent. You can set
Start Time on a 24 hour basis and 15 minutes later than the current
time. For example, if it is 1:00, then you can set the time starting from
1:15. If the set time is incorrect, the warning message will appear and
the machine resets it to the current time.
To cancel delaying a fax, press Off before sending is activated.
When the machine enters power saver mode, the jobs in the segment
list will be deleted to prevent accessing by the unexpected users.
As long as space remains on your device's hard drive, you can add
segments without any restriction.
When the memory is full, the machine can no longer receive any
incoming fax. Secure free memory to resume by removing data stored
in the memory.
• If you have set your machine to this mode and your answering
machine is switched off, or no answering machine is connected to
EXT socket, your machine automatically goes into Fax mode after
a predefined number of rings.
• If your answering machine has a user-selectable ring counter, set
the machine to answer incoming calls within 1 ring.
• If you are in Telephone mode when the answering machine is
connected to your machine, you must switch off the answering
machine, or the outgoing message from the answering machine
will interrupt your phone conversation.
• While the machine is receiving a fax, you can not do the copy job.
65 _Faxing (Optional)
Receiving faxes manually using an extension
telephone
This feature works best when you are using an extension telephone
connected to the EXT socket on the back of your machine. You can receive
a fax from someone you are talking to on the extension telephone, without
going to the fax machine.
When you receive a call on the extension phone and hear fax tones, press
the keys 9 on the extension phone. The machine receives the fax.
Press the buttons slowly in sequence. If you still hear the fax tone from the
remote machine, try pressing 9 once again.
To change the 9 to, for example, 3, follow the next steps.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Receive Start Code.
4. Select On.
5. Press left/right arrows to display number 9.
6. Press OK.
Receiving in secure receiving mode
You may need to prevent your received faxes from being accessed by
unauthorized people. You can turn on secure receiving mode to restrict
printing of received faxes when the machine is unattended. In secure
receiving mode, all incoming faxes go into memory.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup > Secure Receive.
4. Select On.
5. Enter passcode with 4 digit number using the number keypad on the
control panel.
Receiving faxes in memory
Since your machine is a multi-tasking device, it can receive faxes while you
are making copies or printing. If you receive a fax while you are copying or
printing, your machine stores incoming faxes in its memory. Then, as soon
as you finish copying or printing, the machine automatically prints the fax.
ADJUSTING THE DOCUMENT SETTINGS
Before sending a fax, you can adjust the document settings, such as
resolution, darkness, color, duplex and so forth. Refer to explanation of this
section.
Duplex
This function is especially intended for two-sided originals. You can select
whether the machine sends the fax on one side or both sides of the paper.
Load the originals onto the DADF to use this function.
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows to toggle the
value.
•1 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on one side only.
•2 Sided: Is for the originals that are printed on both sides.
Resolution
Changing the resolution setting affects the appearance of the received
document.
Press Fax > the Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right arrows to toggle the
values.
•Standard: Usually recommended for originals with text. This option
will reduce the transmission time.
•Fine: Recommended for the originals containing with small
characters, thin lines, or text that was printed using a dot-matrix
printer.
•Super Fine: Recommended for originals containing with extremely
fine detail, this option is enabled only if the receiving machine also
supports a Super Fine resolution.
Original Type
You can set the original document type to enhance the quality of a
document being scanned.
Press Fax > the Image tab > Original Type. Select the appropriate option
on the screen and press OK.
•Text: For originals with text or line art.
•Text/Photo: For originals with both text and photographs together.
•Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.
Darkness
You can select the degree of darkness of the original document.
Press Fax > the Image tab > Darkness. Press the right arrow to enhance
the darkness degree and press OK.
Erase Background
You can lighten, reduce or delete the dark backgrounds from scanned
colored paper or newspaper originals.
Press Fax > the Image tab > Erase Background. Select the appropriate
option and press OK.
•Off: Disables this feature.
•Auto: Optimizes the background.
To deactivate the Secure Receive feature, press Off. In this case, the
received fax will be printed out.
The document setting herein is for only current job. If you want to
change the default setting on document settings, refer to Admin
Setting > General tab >
Default Settings
. (See "General settings" on
page 84.)
For memory transmission, Super Fine mode is not available. The
resolution setting is automatically changed to Fine.
Faxing (Optional)_66
•Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background
is.
•Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.
Color Mode
You can transmit a fax in color using this feature. But this feature only
applies when you send a fax using On Hook Dial on the control panel.
Press Fax > the Image tab > Color Mode. Select option and OK.
•Mono: Transmits a fax in black and white.
•Color: Transmits a fax in color.
SETTING UP A FAX PHONEBOOK
Use this feature to store destination names, fax numbers and transmission
settings in your machine. There are two options, Individual and Group.
•Individual: Stores up to 500 fax numbers. And the fax numbers which
are stored in Individual work as Speed Dial No..
•Group: Makes groups when you frequently send the same document to
several destinations. You can store up to 100 group dial numbers.
Entries stored here will be available for selection within the sending list
on the Basic tab of Fax. Dialing Group can be also setup comprising of
many Individual entries.
The fax numbers, which are stored in Individual, work as Speed Dial No..
Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.)
1. Press Fax > the Basic tab > Individual.
•
Edit
: Changes the ID, Speed Dial No., and Fax No..
•
New
: Creates the new Speed Dial No..
•
Delete
: Deletes the selected Speed Dial No..
•Search: Searches the fax number which currently stored in
Individual phonebook. When the keyboard pops up, enter ID.
•
Detail
: Shows ID, Fax No. and Included group information if it is
grouped. (See "Storing individual fax numbers (Speed Dial No.)" on
page 66.)
•
Apply
: Inputs the selected fax number to the sending fax number list
in the Basic tab.
•
Cancel
: Cancels the current job and goes to the previous screen.
2. Press New.
3. Enter the name of the fax number in the ID field with the pop up
keyboard, and the fax number in the Fax No. area using the number
keypad on the control panel.
•ID: Enters the name.
•Speed Dial No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If
you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.
•Fax No.: Enters a fax numbers, only the numbers, with the area
code if necessary.
4. Press OK.
Storing Group fax numbers (Group No.)
1. Press Fax > the Basic tab > Group.
2. Press New.
3. Press the input area in Group Dial ID, then the keyboard pops up, enter
the name.
4. Select Group Dial No. with left/right arrows.
•Group Dial ID: Enters the group name.
•Group Dial No.: Is automatically filled with the first free number. If
you want to assign to a different number, use left/right arrows.
5. Press OK.
6. Select an entry from Speed Dial List, and press Add. Repeat this step
until you added entries you need.
Make sure the selected Speed Dial List is copied to the left pane,
Group list.
7. Press OK to save the numbers.
Erase Background is disabled if the Original Type is set to Photo.
Color Mode faxes are only supported when faxes are sent manually.
(See "Sending a fax manually (On Hook Dial)" on page 63.)
67 _Faxing (Optional)
Setting up a fax phonebook using SyncThru™ Web
Service
You can store fax numbers conveniently from the networked computer
using SyncThru™ Web Service.
Individual
1. Open the web browser in your computer.
2. Enter IP address of your machine, then SyncThru™ Web Service
shows.
(Example. http://123.123.123.123)
3. Press Address Book > Individual.
4. Press Add.
5. Enter Name, Speed No., and Fax Number.
6. Press Apply.
Group
1. Open the web browser in your computer.
2. Enter IP address of your machine, then SyncThru™ Web Service
shows.
(Example. http://123.123.123.123)
3. Press Address Book > Group.
4. Press Add Group.
5. Enter Group Name and Speed No..
6. Add individual ddresses to the fax group.
7. Press Apply.
USING THE POLLING OPTION
Polling is used when one fax machine requests another to send a
document. This is useful when the person with the original document is not
in the office. The person who wants to receive the document, calls the
machine holding where the original is stored and requests that the
document be sent. In other words, it "polls" the machine holding that has the
original.
The polling process is as follows:
1. Sender stores the originals in the machine. (See "Storing the originals
for polling" on page 67.)
2. Sender gives the Passcode to the receiver.
3. Receiver dials the fax number and enters the Passcode when
requested. (See "Polling a remote fax" on page 67.)
4. Receiver presses Start to receive the stored fax.
Storing the originals for polling
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document, face down.
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Store.
5. Press the input area then the pop up keyboard, enter Passcode (The
four-digit number which you have to inform the receiver). If you do not
want to set Passcode, enter number 0000 here. Then you can store,
delete, print and receive a fax for polling without any passcode.
6. Select the Delete On Poll option. If you select Off, the sent fax data will
be remained in the machine’s memory even after it’s printing. If you
select On, the fax data will be deleted at the printing point.
7. Press OK to start to store the originals into memory for polling.
8. Give the Passcode to the receiver.
Printing (Deleting) the polling document
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Print (or Delete).
3. Enter Passcode
4. Press OK.
Polling a remote fax
This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the remote
machine.
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Press the Advanced tab > Polling > Poll from Remote.
3. Enter Passcode and Destination Fax No using the number keypad on
the control panel. You have to be informed Passcode from sender with
the remote fax machine.
4. Press OK.
Speed Dial numbers can be imported from an *.csv file.
To use this feature, both the sender and receiver must have the polling
feature.
If you want to use the Mailbox, refer to Storing the originals in the
Mailbox. (See "Storing originals in Mailbox" on page 68.)
Your can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll the fax at a specific
time within 24 hours.
Faxing (Optional)_68
Polling from a remote Mailbox
This option allows you to retrieve (poll) a fax which is stored in the Mailbox
of on the remote machine. Before you start polling, you must be informed of
Mailbox No. and Passcode from the sender. (See "Using Mailbox" on
page 68.)
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Poll from Remote.
3. Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field are
filled with information from the sender.
4. Press OK.
USING MAILBOX
You can store the original data in Mailbox, since you are absent and the
receiver need to be retrieve a fax from you. This feature allows you to
program up to 15 individual Mailbox. Before you store the originals, the
Mailbox must be created.
Creating Mailbox
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Select Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter the
password and press OK.
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press the down arrow to scroll down, if necessary.
5. Press Mailbox Setup.
6. Press Mailbox Configuration. Then the screen displays Mailbox List.
7. Select a Mailbox on the Mailbox List.
8. Press Edit Mailbox.
9. Press Mailbox ID and enter ID with number keypad on the control panel.
Up to 20 numbers you can enter.
10. Enter Mailbox Name with the pop up keyboard. It can be either alphabet
or number up to 20 digits.
11. Enter Mailbox Passcode with the numeric keypad on the control panel.
12. Set Notification option to On, if you want to be notified when a fax is
received into Mailbox.
13. Press OK.
Storing originals in Mailbox
Since you created the mailbox, you can store originals in it.
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document faced down.
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
You can use Delay Poll From Remote to poll a fax from the
remote machine's Mailbox at certain time within 24 hours.
If you set Mailbox Passcode to number 0000, then the machine
does not ask passcode for using Mailbox, such as storing,
deleting, printing, receiving.
69 _Faxing (Optional)
4. Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Store.
5. Enter Mailbox No. and Passcode which are set from Creating Mailbox
in page 68.
6. Press OK.
Faxing to a remote Mailbox
To fax and store the originals in a recipient's Mailbox in this machine, you
can use the Send to Remote feature.
1. Press Fax from the Main screen.
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document face down.
3. Adjust the document settings in the Image tab and the Basic tab.
4. Press the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Send to Remote.
5. Enter Remote Fax No, Mailbox No., and Passcode. All these field are
filled with information from the receiver.
6. Press OK.
PRINTING A REPORT AFTER SENDING A FAX
You can set the machine to print a report whether a fax transmission is
successfully completed or not.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Print/Report tab > Report > Fax Report > Fax Send Report.
4. Press On.
5. Press OK.
SENDING A FAX IN TOLL SAVE TIME
You can set the machine to send a fax in toll save time to save a telephone
fee. If you send a fax after setting this feature, fax data will be stored in
machine's memory and the machine will start to send fax in toll save time.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Toll Save.
• Deleting the data in a specific Mailbox
Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Delete, enter
Mailbox No. and Passcode, and then press OK. When the
confirmation window appears, press Yes to complete the job.
• Printing a Mailbox
Press Fax > the Advanced tab > Mailbox > Print, enter
Mailbox No. and Passcode, and press OK.
The detailed information is available in advanced setup part. (See
"Printing a report" on page 93.)
Faxing (Optional)_70
6. Press On.
7. Press Start Time and set the start date and time with left/right arrows.
8. Press OK.
9. Press End Time and set the end date and time with left/right arrows.
10. Press OK.
11. Press OK.
ADDING DOCUMENTS TO A RESERVED DELAY
FAX JOB
You can add additional documents to the delayed fax job which is saved in
memory.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Send Batch.
6. Press On.
7. Press OK.
• When you send a fax, if a fax number is same as the number in delay
fax, the machine asks whether you want to add more documents to
reserved delay fax.
FORWARDING A RECEIVED FAX TO OTHER
DESTINATION
You can set the machine to forward the received or sent fax to other
destination by a fax or an email. If you are out of office but have to receive
the fax, this feature may be useful.
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by a fax
You can set the machine to forward every fax you sent to other destination
by faxing.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Send
Forward.
6. Press On and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control panel.
7. Press OK.
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by a
fax
With this feature, you can forward every fax you received to other
destination by faxing. When the machine receives a fax, a fax is stored in
the memory then, the machine sends it to the destination you have set.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Fax Setting > Receive
Forward.
6. Press Forward and enter a fax number using the keypad on the control
panel.
• If you want to set the star time and end time, select Start Time and
End Time.
• If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set
the Forward & Print.
7. Press OK.
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by an
email
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting > Send
Forward.
6. Press On.
7. Enter the From and Destination Email option using the keyboard on
the display.
8. Press OK.
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by an
email
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Email Setting > Receive
Forward.
• When you forward a fax by an email, you firstly set the mail server
and IP address in SyncThru™ Web Service.
•If this Fax Forward Settings feature to On, you cannot use a fax
with the On Hook Dial button on the control panel.
If Forward to Server Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.
If Forward to Server Setting is on, this option will be grayed out.
71 _Faxing (Optional)
6. Press Forward and enter the From and Destination Email option using
the keyboard on the display.
• If you want the machine to print the report after forwarding a fax, set
the Forward & Print.
7. Press OK.
Forwarding a sent fax to other destination by server
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Server Setting > Send
Forward.
6. Press On.
7. Press OK.
Forwarding a received fax to other destination by
server
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Fax Forward Settings > Forward to Server Setting > Receive
Forward.
6. Press On.
7. Press OK.
SETTING UP THE END FAX TONE
The end fax tone that sounds to indicate that the fax has been received can
be turned on or off.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on
page 29.)
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
4. Press down arrow on the right side.
5. Press Fax Ending Sound.
6. Press On.
7. Press OK.
SENDING A FAX FROM A COMPUTER
You can send a fax from your computer without going to the machine. To
send a fax from your computer, the Samsung Network PC Fax program
must be installed. This program will be installed when you installed the
printer driver. (See Software section.)
Sending a fax from your Computer
1. Open the document to be sent.
2. Select Print from the File menu.
The Print window will be displayed. It may look slightly different
depending on your application.
3. Select Samsung Network PC Fax from the Print window.
4. Click Print or OK.
5. Enter the recipients’ numbers and select the option.
If you want to use a cover page, check Use cover page.
Check Notify me on delivery, when the fax delivered to the recipients
successfully.
6. Click Send.
Checking a sent fax list
You can check a sent fax list on your computer.
From the
Start
menu, click Programs or All Programs > Samsung
Printers > Network PC Fax > Fax Journal. Then, the Fax Journal
appears with the fax list you have sent.
If Forward to Email Setting is on, this option will be grayed out. The
server setting must be done in SyncThru™ Web Service prior to this
option on.
If Forward to Email Setting is on, this option will be grayed out. The
server setting must be done in SyncThru™ Web Service prior to this
option on.
For more information about Samsung Network PC Fax, click Help.
Using USB memory device_72
using USB memory device
This chapter explains how to use a USB memory device with your machine.
This chapter includes:
• About USB memory
• Understanding the USB screen
• Plugging in a USB memory device
• Scanning to an USB memory device
• Scan to USB
• Changing the scan feature settings
• Printing from a USB memory device
ABOUT USB MEMORY
USB memory devices are available with a variety of memory capacities to
give you more room for storing documents, presentations, downloaded
music and videos, high resolution photographs, or whatever other files you
want to store or move.
You can do the following on your machine using a USB memory device:
• Scan documents and save them on a USB memory device.
• Print data stored on a USB memory device.
• Format the USB memory device.
UNDERSTANDING THE USB SCREEN
To use the USB feature, press USB on the Main screen. If the screen
displays an other menu, press ( ) to go to the Main screen.
Press USB Format, USB Print or Scan to USB.
•USB Format: You can delete image files stored on an USB memory
device one by one or all at once by reformatting the device.
•USB Print: You can directly print files stored on an USB memory
device. You can print TIFF, BMP, JPEG, PDF, and PRN files. (See
"Printing from a USB memory device" on page 76.)
•Scan to USB: You can specify image size, file format, or color mode
for each scanning to USB job. (See "Scan to USB" on page 73. )
PLUGGING IN A USB MEMORY DEVICE
The USB memory port on the left side of your machine is designed for USB
V1.1 and USB V2.0 memory devices. Your machine supports USB memory
devices with FAT16/FAT32 and sector size of 512 bytes.
Check your USB memory device’s file system from your dealer.
You must use only an authorized USB memory device with an A plug type
connector.
Use only a metal-shielded USB memory device.
Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on the left side of
your machine.
When an USB memory is inserted into the USB memory port on your
machine, USB icon shows on the display screen.
73 _Using USB memory device
SCANNING TO AN USB MEMORY DEVICE
You can scan a document and save the scanned image onto a USB
memory device. When you scan a document, the machine uses the default
settings such as the resolution. You can also customize your own scan
setting. (See "Changing the scan feature settings" on page 74.)
Scanning
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
2. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document, face down.
3. Press USB from the Main screen.
4. Press Scan to USB.
5. Set the scan features in the Advanced, Image, or Output tabs. (See
"Changing the scan feature settings" on page 74.)
6. Press Start on the control panel to begin scanning.
7. After scanning is complete, you can remove the USB memory device
from the machine.
SCAN TO USB
Basic tab
•Name: The folder names on the USB memory device.
•Date: Tha date which folders are made.
•Select: Selects the folder which has been chosen from the Name.
•New Folder: Makes a new folder on the USB memory device.
•Detail: Views the details of currently selected folder or file.
•Rename: Renames the folder or file name.
•Delete: Deletes the folder on the USB memory device.
•Duplex: Selects whether the machine scans on one side of the
paper (1 Sided), both sides of the paper (2 Sided), or both sides of
paper but back is rotated 180 degrees (2 Sided, Rotate Side 2).
•Resolution: Selects the scanning resolution value.
•File Name: Names a file before you scan a document by just clicking
this field.
•Back: Returns to the previous screen.
Advanced tab
•Original Size: Sets the originals to a specific fixed size. (See
"Original Size" on page 74. )
•Back: Returns to the previous screen.
Image tab
•Original Type: Selects whether the original is text or photo. (See
"Original Type" on page 74.)
•Color Mode: Adjusts the color options of the scan output. If the
original is color and you want to scan in color, press Color Mode.
(See "Color Mode" on page 74.)
•Darkness: Adjusts the degree of darkness of the scan output. Use
left/right arrow to adjust the values. (See "Darkness" on page 75.)
•Erase Background: Erases backgrounds like paper patterns. (See
"Erase Background" on page 75.)
•Scan to Edge: Scans originals from edge-to-edge. (See "Scan to
Edge" on page 75.)
•Back: Returns to the previous screen.
• Do not remove the USB memory device while the machine is in
operation, or writing to or reading from USB memory. The
machine warranty does not cover damage caused by use’s
misuse.
• If your USB memory device has certain features (example,
security key, security partition, booting disk, password settings
and so forth), do not use the USB memory device with your
machine. The files stored in the USB memory device may be
corrupted, or the machine may not automatically detect it. For
details about these features, see device’s User’s Guide.
If your USB memory device has certain features (example, security
key, security partition, booting disk, password settings and so forth),
do not use the USB memory device with your machine. The files
stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted, or the machine
may not automatically detect it. For details about these features, see
device’s User’s Guide.
Using USB memory device_74
Output tab
•Quality: Adjusts the display quality of the scan output. (See
"Quality" on page 75.)
•Scan Preset: Automatically changes some scan options such as file
format, resolution, and more. You can adjust options to fit each
specific purpose. (See "Scan Preset" on page 75.)
•File Format: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See "File
Format" on page 75.)
•File Policy: Selects the file format of the scan output. (See "File
Policy" on page 75.)
•Back: Returns to the previous screen.
CHANGING THE SCAN FEATURE SETTINGS
This part explains how to adjust the document settings for each scan job,
such as resolution, duplex, original size, type, color mode, darkness, and
more. The options you change will be maintained for a certain time, but after
that period, the options will be reset to default values.
Duplex
This feature especially applies when the original documents to be scanned
are two-sided. You can select whether the machine scans only one side of
the paper or both sides of the paper.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Duplex. Use left/right arrows
to toggle the values.
•1 Sided: For originals that are printed on one side only.
•2 Sided: For originals that are printed on both sides.
•2 Sided, Rotate Side 2: For originals that are printed on both sides.
But the back is rotated 180 degrees.
Resolution
You can adjust document resolution.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Basic tab > Resolution. Use left/right
arrows to toggle the values. The higher value you select the clear result you
get. But the scanning time may take longer.
Original Size
The machine senses and determines the size of the original.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Advanced tab > Original Size. Use up/
down arrows to go to the next screen. Select the appropriate option and
press OK.
Original Type
You can set the original document type in order to enhance the quality of a
document being scanned.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Original Type. Select the
appropriate option and press OK.
•Text: For originals that have text or line art.
•Text/Photo: For originals that have both text and photographs
together.
•Photo: For originals that are continuous tone photographs.
Color Mode
Use this option to scan the original in
Mono
, Gray or
Color
mode.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab >
Color Mode
. Select the
appropriate option and press OK.
•
Color
: Uses color to display an image. 24 bits per pixel, 8 bits for
each RGB, is used for 1 pixel.
•Gray: Uses the black gradation to display an image. 8 bits per pixel.
To use 2 Sided and 2 Sided, Rotate Side 2, you have to load the
originals on the DADF. Because, if the machine can not detect the
original on DADF, automatically changes the option to 1 Sided.
75 _Using USB memory device
•
Mono
: Displays an image in black and white. 1 bit per pixel.
Darkness
You can select the degree of darkness of the scanned output. If your
original document is light or faded, press the right arrow to make the output
darker.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Darkness. Press right arrow
to enhance the darkness degree then, press OK.
Erase Background
You can lighten, reduce or deletes the dark background from scanning
colored paper or newspaper originals.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab >
Erase Background
. Select
the appropriate option and press OK.
•Off: Disables this feature.
•Auto: Optimizes the background.
•Enhance: The higher the number is, the more vivid the background
is.
•Erase: The higher the number is, the lighter the background is.
Scan to Edge
You can set the machine to scan full size of a page as it is. Usually, the
machine scans a page except edges, which means the margin, especially
when you do the copy job with certain sized paper in the tray. But if you
scan and sent it right away via the network, as the file, the machine does not
need to exclude the edges from the originals.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Image tab > Scan to Edge. Select
On
and
press OK.
Quality
You can use this option to produce a high quality document. Higher quality
you select a larger file size you get.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > Quality.
Scan Preset
This feature allows you to use optimized settings for your specific scan job.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > Scan Preset.
•Sharing and Printing: Produces a small-sized file for normal quality
documents.
•High Quality Printing: Set this option for high quality output with the
largest file size.
•Archival Record: For the electronic file which is of the smallest file
size of the output.
•OCR: Produces scanned output for OCR software. You can expect
the highest quality images.
•Simple Scan: Used for a simple document with text only. The file
size of output is small.
•Custom: Applies the current scan settings that you have chosen.
File Format
You can select the file format before you proceed with the scanning job.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Format.
•PDF: Scans originals in PDF format.
•Single-Page TIFF: Scans originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), but several originals are scanned as one file.
•Multi-Page TIFF: Scans the originals in TIFF (Tagged Image File
Format), and several originals are scanned as several file.
•JPEG: Scans original in JPEG format.
•BMP: Scans original in BMP format.
File Policy
You can choose the policy for generating file name before you proceed with
the scan job through USB. If the USB memory already has the same name
when you entered a new file name, you can rename or overwrite it.
Press USB > Scan to USB > the Output tab > File Policy.
•Rename: If the USB memory already has the same name when you
entered a new file name, the file will be saved as a different name
that is automatically programmed.
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected
for Color Mode.
When you set Color Mode to Mono, the Quality option is grayed out.
The file format JPEG cannot be selected if Mono has been selected
for Color Mode.
Using USB memory device_76
•Overwrite:You can set the machine to delete previous job
information on USB as you store new job information.
PRINTING FROM A USB MEMORY DEVICE
You can directly print files stored on a USB memory device. You can print
TIFF, BMP, JPEG, and PRN files.
Direct Print option supported file types:
• PRN: Only files created by provided driver with your machine are
compatible.
• PRN files can be created by selecting the Print to file check box when
you print a document. The document will be saved as a PRN file, rather
than printed on paper. Only PRN files created in this fashion can be
printed directly from USB memory. See Software section to learn how to
create a PRN file.
• BMP: BMP Uncompressed
• TIFF: TIFF 6.0 Baseline
• JPEG: JPEG Baseline
• PDF: PDF 1.4 and below
To print a document from a USB memory device:
1. Insert a USB memory device into the USB memory port on your
machine.
Your machine automatically detects the device and reads data stored on it.
2. Press USB from the Main screen.
3. Use up/down arrows until the file you want appears. Select the file
name.
If there is a folder, select folder name and press Select.
4. Press USB Print.
5. Press Start on the control panel.
If your USB memory device has certain features (example, security
key, security partition, booting disk, password settings and so forth),
do not use the USB memory device with your machine. The files
stored in the USB memory device may be corrupted, or the machine
may not automatically detect it. For details about these features, see
device’s User’s Guide.
77 _Using document box
using document box
This chapter explains how to use Document Box with your machine.
This chapter includes:
• About Document Box
• Understanding the Document box screen • Storing documents to Document box
ABOUT DOCUMENT BOX
The Document Box feature makes it possible to store scanned data to the
hard drive. Users can send the stored data to various destinations such as
print, fax, e-mail, or an FTP/SMB server. The Document Box provides
three types of boxes: public ( ) , secured ( ) , and common ( ) .
The public box can be created by all users and all users can store data to
public boxes. The secured box can be created with password by all users.
This means that the only users who know the password can access to the
box and store their data. A common box is provided by default. Users
cannot create, edit, and delete the common box. When a user needs to
store a job that is not assigned to a box (i.e., fax receiving or PC printing in
store mode), the data will be stored in the common box by default.
You can also see the System Box tab from the Document Box screen.
The System Box is used for temporary data backup such as printing in
delayed mode, printing proof page.
UNDERSTANDING THE DOCUMENT BOX
SCREEN
To use the Document Box feature, press Document Box on the Main
screen. If the screen displays an other menu, press ( ) to go to the Main
screen.
Document Box Screen
s
•
User Box
tab: Create the box where you can save documents such
as the file you have printed, sent by email, or scanned. When you
create a box, you can set the password to secure your box. The box
with a password is called Secured Box, and without it, it is called
public box.
•System Box tab: The machine provided default boxes, which you
cannot modify them.
•Type: Shows the box is secured or not.
•Box Name: Shows the box name.
•Owner: Shows the user name of a box.
•Date: Shows the date of a box created.
•File: Shows the number of total files in the box.
•Add: Lets you add more boxes.
•
Delete
: Deletes the selected box.
•Edit: Lets you modify a box name and an owner name.
•
Detail
: Shows box information.
•Report: Prints the information about the documents inside the
selected box.
•Search: Searches a box with a box name or an owner name.
•Enter: Prints or sends the stored file in the box.
Using document box_78
Box Adding Screen
You can create a new box to store your scanned data. To add a new
Document Box, press Add on the Document Box screen.
•Box Name: Enter a box name.
•Owner: Enter the user name of the box's owner.
•Secured Box: Check to make a secured-type box.
•New Password: Enter a new password to access the box.
•Confirm Password: Enter the password again.
Edit a Box Screen
You can modify a box name or an owner name. To modify a Document
Box, select a box from the Document Box list and press Edit.
•Box Name: Enter a new box name.
•Owner: Enter a user name of a box.
Document List Screen
You can enter a document box by clicking Enter from the Document Box
screen, you can use the stored documents again.
•Document Name: Shows the document’s name.
•Owner: Shows the user name of a document.
•Date: Shows the date of a document stored.
•Page: Shows the number of total pages in the document.
•Add From Scan: Lets you add a new document from scanning.
•
Detail
: Shows a document’s information.
•Search: Searches a file with a document name or an owner name.
•Edit: Lets you to modify a document name and an owner name.
•
Delete
: Deletes the selected document.
•Copy: Copies a selected document to another document box.
•Move: Moves a selected document to another document box.
•Combine: Merge documents located in two or more boxes.
•Send To: Sends the selected document(s) to a destination such as
e-mail, fax, server, or USB.
•Print: Prints the selected document(s) out.
•Back: Returns to the previous screen.
STORING DOCUMENTS TO DOCUMENT BOX
This machine allows you to store the scanned data on the hard drive.
Storing documents from document box
You can scan orignals directly from Document Box menu.
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document, face down.
2. Press Document Box from the Main screen.
3. Press a document box with which you need to store a document.
4. Press Enter.
5. Press Add From Scan.
6. Set the scan settings.
7. Press Start to begin scanning.
Storing documents during copy, scan, fax function
During copying, scanning, or faxing, you can save the scanned originals to
Document Box in your machine.
The following are some constraints about the document box.
• You can create maximum 100 document boxes.
• A document box can contain up to 200 stored-documents.
• The length of a box name is limited to 20 characters.
• Common ( ) box is already created by default.
79 _Using document box
1. Place the originals face up in the DADF. Or you can use the scanner
glass with a single original document, face down.
2. Press Copy > the Basic tab > Saving to box.
Or press Scan > Scan to Email (Scan to Server or Scan to PC) > the
Basic tab > Saving to box.
Or press Fax > the Basic tab > Saving to box.
3. Enter the file name in the File Name field with the pop up keyboard.
Then press OK.
4. Select a destination box and press OK.
5. Press Start from the control panel to begin a job.
Using standard workflow_80
using standard workflow
This chapter explains how to use standard workflow with your machine.
This chapter includes:
• About Standard Workflow
• Understanding the Standard Workflow Screen • Various Operations with Workform
ABOUT STANDARD WORKFLOW
Standard Workflow is a feature for users to conveniently operate jobs with
pre-arranged task sets called workform. Standard Workflow makes it
possible to execute multiple jobs in a single session by defined the job
workform. Once you create a workform, you can reuse the same workflow
only with one-touch operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE STANDARD
WORKFLOW SCREEN
To use the Standard Workflow feature, press Standard Workflow on the
Main screen.
Workflow Screen
Favorite Tab
Favorite workform is a shortcut of public or private workform. You can
select a frequently-used public or private workform, and then the
workform appears on the favorite workform tab.
•Execute: Start the job defined in the workform.
My Workform and Public Workform Tab
To switch to the other display screen, press the left or right arrow on
the display screen.
INPUT
Scan
Document Box
Fax
TRANSMIT
Email
FTP/SMB server
Document Box
Print
Fax
Fax input workform is automatically executed when receiving fax.
Therefore fax input workforms cannot be registered to a favorite
workform.
81 _Using standard workflow
•Type: Shows the workform is locked by the creator or not.
•Name: Shows the workform name.
•Input: Shows the workform’s input module name.
•Transmit: Shows the workform’s transmit module name. If two or
more modules are added in transmit workform, this column displays
Multi without any icon.
•Properties: Shows the workform’s perperties.
•Create: Creates a new private workform.
•
Delete
: Deletes the selected workform.
•Edit: Lets you to modify a workform.
•
Detail
: Shows detailed workform information.
•Search: Searches a workform with a workform name.
•Task: Imports a workform from USB, export a workform to USB,
copy or move a workform to public workform. It also makes a
shortcut in favorite workform tab by clicking Set to Favorite WF or
removes the shortcut by clicking Set to Normal WF.
•Execute: Start the job defined in the workform.
Workform Creating Screen
You can create a new workform. To add a new workform, press Create on
the My Workform or Public Workform tab.
Input Tab
•Input: Shows the workform’s input module name.
•Status: shows the setting status. To create a workform, you have to
set every mandatory items of the assigned input module.
•
Settings
: Configures the setting values for the module.
•Next: Goes to the next tab.
Transmit Tab
•Transmit: Shows the workform’s transmit module name.
•Status: shows the setting status. To create a workform, you have to
set every mandatory items of every assigned transmit modules.
•
Add Module
: Add transmit module(s).
•
Delete
: Deletes the selected module.
•
Settings
: Configures the setting values for the module.
•Previous: Goes to the next tab.
•Next: Goes to the next tab.
Properties Tab
•Workform Name: Sets the workform name.
•Delay Start: Schedule the start date and time to start.
•Expired: Sets the expire date.
•Secured: Locks the workform with password protection.
•Previous: Goes to the next tab.
VARIOUS OPERATIONS WITH WORKFORM
User can operate various jobs with workforms. The following items show
some example cases.
You can create maximum 100 workforms.
After you do fill out all mandatory items, the Save & Execute and
Save button are enabled.
After you do fill out all mandatory items, the Save & Execute and
Save button are enabled.
Before you add module, make sure that the parameters are correctly
configured for each module.
• Fax: See "Preparing to fax" on page 61.
• Email, Server: See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP
(Scan to Server)" on page 56.
Using standard workflow_82
Scan to multi-destination
You can scan a document once and send it to multiple destinations such as
email, SMB/FTP server, document box, and print.
Fax forwarding
You can forward the received fax to another destinations. To forward a fax,
your machine checks caller’s ID that the fax service provides. When the
caller is also Samsung’s fax machine, your machine checks the fax number
that the user defined for the machine information.
When you need to forward different destination for each caller, you can
create several workforms for each caller’s ID.
Auto redirection
If the fax transmission failed, the machine re-sends the fax image to the
user’s email address.
Delayed start feature
You can schedule the job’s execution time by setting Delay Start in
Properties tab when you creating a workform.
Notification feature
You can notify the job processing result to an email.
Approval feature
Before executing the transmit module, you can get approval from an
administrator.
Before you add module, make sure that the parameters are correctly
configured for each module.
• Fax: See "Preparing to fax" on page 61.
• Email, Server: See "Scanning originals and sending via SMB/FTP
(Scan to Server)" on page 56.
Make sure that you enabled Default Fax in Machine Setup > Admin
Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow Management. (See
"Standard Workflow Management" on page 92.)
Make sure that you enabled Default Fax in Machine Setup > Admin
Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow Management. (See
"Standard Workflow Management" on page 92.)
Make sure that you enabled Complete Notification in Machine
Setup > Admin Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow
Management. (See "Standard Workflow Management" on page 92.)
Make sure that you enabled Approve in Machine Setup > Admin
Setting > Setup tab > Standard Workflow Management. (See
"Standard Workflow Management" on page 92.)
83 _Machine status and advanced setup
machine status and advanced setup
This chapter explains how to browse the current status of your machine, and the method of setting for the advanced machine
setup. Please read this chapter carefully in order to use your machine's diverse features.
This chapter includes:
• Machine Setup
• Browsing the machine’s status
• General settings
• Copy Setup
• Fax Setup
• Network Setup
•Security
• Optional Service
• Document Box Management
• Printing a report
MACHINE SETUP
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Select the appropriate item for your occasion.
•Machine Status: Shows the current machine status.
•Admin Setting: Allows administrator to set up the machine.
When you press Admin Setting, login message pops up. Enter
password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)
•Tray Management: Shows the currently installed tray and their
status. You can also change the paper settings for each tray.
•Usage Page Report: You can print the report on the amount of
printouts depending on the paper size and type.
Machine Status screen
Press Machine Setup on the control panel and press Machine Status.
•Supplies Life tab: Displays the remainders or the usage count of the
machine supplies. Use up/down arrows to switch screens.
•Machine Info tab: Displays the detailed information about the
machine, and some options allows for validating your machine. (See
"Browsing the machine’s status" on page 83.)
•Back: Returns to the previous screen.
Admin Setting screen
Gives you access to detailed machine settings.
•General tab: Sets the basic parameters of the machine such as
location, date, time, and more. (See "General settings" on page 84.)
•Setup tab: Sets the values for fax, network and login. Also you can
set to enable the feature listed on the screen.
•Print/Report tab: Prints configuration or font list and displays a
report of machine features. (See "Printing a report" on page 93.)
•Back: Returns to the previous screen.
BROWSING THE MACHINE’S STATUS
You can browse the machine information and validate some features of the
machine.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Machine Status > the Machine Info tab.
When you press Admin Setting, a login message appears. If the
administrator set the password, you have to enter the password every
time you want to use Admin Setting. (See "Setting the authentication
password" on page 29.)
Machine status and advanced setup_84
GENERAL SETTINGS
Before you get ready to using the machine, it is recommended to set up the
machine parameters.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK. (Factory setting is 1111.)
3. Press the General tab.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Machine Details This option shows the customer support
information on the email address and the phone
number you stored from Admin Setting. Also, you
can check the machine's serial number, or the
hardware and software information specification.
Print/Report You can print various helpful and informative
reports such as
System Report
, Fax Report and
Scan Report
. (See "Printing a machine report" on
page 94.)
Tray Status The screen shows the trays installed on your
machine, and their current configurations. Select
the tray and Edit to change the settings for paper
type and size.
Usage Counters You can view the amount of each category that
your machine has printed so far. To print this
report, see "Printing a report" on page 93.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Device Info The sub-options available are Service Center
Registration and Contact Info. You may enter
information on service center and purchasing
point.
Date & Time You can set the date and time. (See "Setting the
date and time" on page 29.)
Default Settings •Default Window: Set the first window that will
appear on the display screen after turning on
the machine or waking up from the Power
Save. For example, if you select Fax as a
default window, the first window will be the
Basic tab of the Fax feature. In case you want
to show ID Copy as a default window, you need
to enable this feature in Default Option
previously.
•Default Option: Changes all the default values
for copying, faxing, emailing, scanning and
paper at once. (See "Changing the default
settings" on page 30.)
•Home: Changes the order of windows that will
appears on the display screen.
Depending on the optional kit you installed
or the category you selected, the selectable
options on the display screen may differ.
Measurements This option lets you change the measurement unit
to use (mm or inch), and set the numeric
separation (comma or period).
Timers The machine cancels a printing job if data does
not be received in specific time.
•System Timeout: The machine returns to the
default value after certain time the machine
waits. You can set a time for maximum 10
minutes.
•Held Job Timeout: The machine holds a job
for a specific time period. You can set a time
period for at least an hour.
Language It allows you to change the language that appears
on the touch screen.
Power Saver You can reduce energy consumption by setting
these features. Power Saver has three options,
first Scan Power Save turns off the scanner lamp
under the glass. And Power Save turns off all the
fans within the machine after a certain time. Low
Power Save turns off the fans within the machine
except a core fan for the fuser unit. (See "Using
energy saving feature" on page 29.)
85 _Machine status and advanced setup
Tray Management This feature allows you to select the tray and
paper you use for a printing job. Paper size, paper
type, and paper color options are adjusted here.
Tray Confirmation Message is to activate the
window asking whether you set the paper size and
type for the just opened tray.
•Auto Tray Switch: If tray1 and tray2 are filled
with letter size paper, when tray1 is empty and
this option is On, then the machine continues
printing with paper in tray2.
•Auto Continue: When the paper is
mismatched, meaning that tray1has filled with
the letter size paper, but the printing job needs
A4 size paper, the machine will wait for 30
seconds to paper in tray1 with proper sized
paper. After 30 seconds, the machine
automatically starts printing with Letter sized
paper.
•Paper Substitution: When the paper is
mismatched, this option sets the machine print
A4 size paper in the Letter size paper or vice
versa.
•Wide A4: It is useful when printing in DOS
mode. This option prints 80 charactors in a
line, which printing 78 charactors in a line is
usual in DOS mode.
Altitude
Adjustment Print quality is affected by atmospheric pressure,
which atmospheric pressure is determined by the
height of the machine above sea level. This
feature lets you adjust the altitude in a height
district. Higher altitude location need to set this
feature to High 3, which affects print quality.
Output Options Output Options is for, when the staples run out,
you to let the machine stop processing and wait to
refill the staples or continue the job. If you set
Within Job Offsetting to On, the output paper is
placed and sorted by printout-sets.
Contention
Management This feature lets you to select the priority between
copy jobs and print jobs.
•Priority: Set the priority by numbering the job.
The machine starts from the least to the
highest number in order.
•First In, First Out: The machine does an
asked job in order.
Sound You can adjust the loudness of the machine
sound. Press Fault to adjust the machine's error
sound. Select Conflict if you pressed the wrong
option. Press Selection to sound whenever you
press the selection from your touch screen.
Supplies
Management The machine gives you the notification of the
imaging unit and toner cartridge to reorder, and
resets the used fuser counter, bias transfer roller,
feed roller and document feeder friction pad
counter.
Machine Test The machine prints the test image patterns using
Image Quality Test Patterns.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
HDD Spooling To spool documents in HDD for the network
printing, select On.
Manual Image
Overwrite You can set the machine to delete previous job
information on HDD as you store new job
information. To activate this feature, go to Admin
Setting > the Setup tab > Optional Service and
set the Manual Image Overwrite option to
Enable. After activating this feature, you can
overwrite the HDD by pressing Start in the
display.
Stored Job File
Policy You can choose the file policy for generating file
name before you proceed with the job through
HDD. If the HDD memory already has the same
name when you entered a new file name, you can
rename or overwrite it.
•Rename: If the HDD memory already has the
same name when you enter a new file name,
the file will be saved as a different name that is
automatically programmed.
•Overwrite: You can set the machine to delete
previous job information on HDD as you store
new job information.
Country You can change the country, then some the
values for fax and paper size will be changed
automatically for your country.
After installing the fax kit, you must change the
country.
Home Window
Background To change the background image of the
machine's LCD UI to suit user’s preference, press
Custom, select a customized background image
file on the list, and then press Load.
Users can register their own background image
from SyncThru™ Web Service. Click Settings >
Machine Settings > System > Home Window
Customization, and add your images on the list.
Multi-Bin You can set the default mode for multi-output bin
from the following options:
•Mailbox: Stacks the printouts in a bin that the
user selects from the output options in the
printer driver. You can modify each bin’s name
from Rename. You also can merge two or
more bins from Link Setup. By using Default
Setup, you can assign each job’s default bin
such as bin 2 for copy job, bin 4 for fax job, etc.
•Job Seperator: Stacks the printouts in each
seperated bin in sequence by job.
•Collator: Stacks the printouts in the same
order as the originals.
•Stacker: Stacks the printouts in bins one-by-
one. When bin 1 is full, printouts will be
stacked in bin 2.
You can only use this feature if you have
installed optional 2-Bin Finisher or 4-Bin
Mailbox.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Machine status and advanced setup_86
COPY SETUP
For copy output, you can set up several options in advance.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the Setup tab >
Copy Setup
.
FAX SETUP
This machine offers you with various options to you for setting up the fax
system. You can change the default settings for your preferences and
needs.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the Setup tab > Fax Setup.
Stamp You can print optional information such as ID,
Machine Information, Date & Time, Comment,
and Page Number, on the output paper for
tracking.
•Items: Select item(s) to print on each paper.
•Position: Decide the position to stamp either
Top or Bottom of paper.
•Appearance: Decide the appearance of the
text either Opaque or Transparent. When you
select Opaque, the text background color is
filled with opaque white.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Manual ID Copy
Setup This option sets the ID copy settings such as the
number of images or copying positions manually.
(See "Copying ID with the manual ID copy
option" on page 45.)
OPTION DESCRIPTION
The fax options are different from country to country depending on
the international communication regulatory. If the display screen
does not show or gray out some of the fax options explained
herein, it means that the grayed out function does not supported in
your communication environment.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Machine ID & Fax
No Enter the machine ID and fax number which will
be printed at the top of each page. Select the
country name. This option usually pre-set for user.
Receive Start Code This feature works best when you are using an
extension telephone connected to the EXT socket
on the back of your machine. You can receive a
fax from someone you are talking to on the
extension telephone, without going to the fax
machine. (See "Receiving faxes manually using
an extension telephone" on page 65.)
Error Correction
Mode It helps with poor line quality and makes sure any
faxes you send are properly transmitted to any
other ECM-equipped fax machines. Sending a fax
using ECM may take more time.
Fax Initial Setup You can set Receive Mode for
Telephone
,
Fax
or
Answering Machine/Fax
, and Dial Mode at either
Pulse (Dial Pulse) or Tone (Multi Frequency).
When you select Answering Machine/Fax, you
can receive a fax while the line is being used by
the answering machine. (See "Changing the
receive modes" on page 64.)
Contact your local telephone company for Dial
Mode setting information.
Ring to Answer You can specify the number of times the machine
rings before answering an incoming call.
Receive Header Use this option to automatically print the page
number, date and time of fax reception at the
bottom of each page.
Secure Receive You may need to prevent your received faxes from
being accessed by unauthorized people. This
feature restricts printing of received faxes when
the machine is unattended. If you select this
option to On, all incoming faxes go into memory.
A four-digit Passcode is used when you want to
print out received faxes in memory. (See
"Receiving in secure receiving mode" on
page 65.)
87 _Machine status and advanced setup
NETWORK SETUP
You may set up the network with the machine's touch screen. Before doing
that, you must have the information concerning the type of network
protocols and computer system you use. If you are not sure which setting to
use, contact your network administrator to configure this machine network.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the Setup tab > Network Setup.
Received Fax
Printing When receiving a fax containing pages longer
than the paper loaded in the tray, the machine can
reduce the size of the original to fit the size of the
paper loaded in the machine. If this feature is set
to Off, the machine cannot reduce the original to
fit onto one page. The original will be divided and
printed in actual size on two or more pages. If you
set this option to On and set the discard size to
10mm and the received data is longer then the
currently set paper in the tray, the machine
minuses the data that would have been on the
specified discard segment.
Redial The machine can automatically redial a remote fax
machine, if it was busy. You can set the number of
redial attempts and an interval between attempts.
Selecting 0 for Redial Times means that the
machine will not use this feature.
Speaker Volume This controls the sound when a fax actually starts
to transfer data. If this option is On, the machine
sounds from a fax starts until a fax finishes. With
Comm. the machine sounds only until the
communication is succeeded. No sound with Off
option.
Prefix Dial This feature allows you to set a prefix of up to five
digits. This number will be dialed before any
automatic number is dialed. User may set this to
access a PABXa (example 9) or area code
number (example 02). When sending a fax, there
may be a job which has same recipient's number
in delay jobs. In this case, the machine can send
faxes to the same recipient in a batch.
Junk Fax Setup The machine does not accept faxes sent from
remote stations if their numbers are stored in the
memory as junk fax numbers. You can enter a
maximum of 10 junk fax numbers. Press Junk
Fax Setup and Edit, then, enter the fax numer. If
you have set Caller ID enabled, you can browse
the last received fax numbers and select a fax
number from the list.
Ring Volume This feature adjusts the ring volume. When you
select Off, the machine does not ring.
Dial Tone Volume When you press On Hook Dial to send a fax, you
can hear a specific tone. To adjust the tone
volume, you can use this feature. Value 1 is the
lowest volume. Use left/right arrows to adjust the
value.
Mailbox Setup •Document Policy: You can set the document
stored in Mailbox to delete or retain documents
after. Select Delete On Poll of each option to
delete, Delete On Print to remain the data.
•Mail Configuration: You can create, edit, or
delete Mailbox. Enter Mailbox ID, Mailbox
Name, Mailbox Passcode by pressing options.
(See "Using Mailbox" on page 68.)
If you set the Notification option to On, you
are notified when a fax is received in
Mailbox. (See "Creating Mailbox" on
page 68.)
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Output Tray This feature lets you select the paper tray to use
for receiving a fax.
Toll Save Set the machine to send a fax in the toll save time
for saving. (See "Sending a fax in toll save
time" on page 69.)
Send Batch The machine asks you whether you want to add
the documents to the reserved delay fax, if the fax
number you have dialed is same as the delay fax
number. (See "Adding documents to a reserved
delay fax job" on page 70.)
Fax Forward
Settings You can forward a sent or received fax to other
destination by a fax or an email. (See "Forwarding
a received fax to other destination" on page 70.)
Fax Ending Sound This setting selects whether the end fax tone is on
or off.
Set whether you turn on or off the sound of an end
of fax receiving. (See "Setting up the end Fax
tone" on page 71.)
Caller ID If you have set this option, the machine
remembers the last twenty fax numbers.
a.Private Automatic Branch Exchange
OPTION DESCRIPTION
TCP/IP Protocol Select appropriate protocol and configure
parameters to use the network environment.
There are lots of parameters to be set,
therefore, if you are not sure, leave as it is,
or consult the network administrator.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Machine status and advanced setup_88
SECURITY
This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data, or change the
password.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the Setup tab > Security.
Access Control
.
Apple Talk
Protocol For Macintosh network environments, select this
option. This option provides packet transmission
and routing functionality for networking.
Ethernet Speed Configure the network transmission speed.
Clear Setting Reverts the network settings to the default values.
802.1x You can select the user authentication for network
communication.
For details information consult the network
administrator.
IPv6 Machine supports IPv6 addresses for network
printing and managements.
•IPv6 Activate: When you select On, the Host
Name and Link-Local Address will
automatically be entered into the address field.
•DHCPv6 Configuration: If you have a
DHCPv6 server on your network, you can set
one of the option for default dynamic host
configuration.
•Routers: Use DHCPv6 only when
requested by a router.
•DHCPv6 Addresses: Always use DHCPv6
regardless of router request.
•DHCPv6 Off: Never use DHCPv6
regardless of router request.
OPTION DESCRIPTION • Using SyncThru™ Web Service, administrators can classify
users into several groups according to each user’s role. Each
user’s authorization, authentication and accounting will be
controlled by the group’s role definition. For example, if a group
A only has authorization to use the copy function, users in
group A can only copy with the machine: they cannot fax or
scan. You can set this feature from SyncThru™ Web Service.
Click Security > User Access Control > Authority.
• When the Single Sign-On (SSO) feature is enabled, users just
need to log in to the service only one time. Then the system
automatically checks the user’s authority based on the user ID
and password. The SSO feature is related to all of the security
functions such as authentication, authorization and accounting.
The SSO feature can be configured from SyncThru™ Web
Service. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an
administrator. (See "Managing your machine from the
website" on page 99.) And click Security > User Access
Control > Authentication> Options.
OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION
Authentication
Method No
Authentication It disables Authentication
Method.
Local
Authentication It enables the local authentication
mode. The user ID and password
is stored in an internal storage of
the device. The administrator can
see the user information from the
SyncThru™ Web Service >
Security > User Access Control
> User Profile menu.
89 _Machine status and advanced setup
Authentication
Method
(Continue)
Network
Authentication It enables the network
authentication mode. When the
users already belong to a server-
based networks, the Network
Authentication system can be
simply configured with the existing
server. Then the user can access
with the ID and password stored in
the remote authentication server.
To use any features in Network
Authentication mode, the users
have to get a certificate from SMB,
FTP, LDAP, or Keberos server
defined in SyncThru™ Web
Service.
Foreign Device
Interface When you install the optional FDI
kit, select Foreign Device
Interface Configuration Setup to
activate it.
•Job Timer: If there is not
enough credit, you can set the
machine to cancel a job right
away or wait a designated
amount of time for a deposit.
•Print Job Control: When it is
enabled, the both computer
printing and copying are
possible since the credit
remains. With Disable, only
the copy printing job needs the
credit. (which means a
computer printing a report or a
fax job needs no credits)
•Inhibit Services: When no
credit is left, the machine
disables the copy job only with
Copy Only. With All Services,
scanning service and copy job
are disabled.
•Internal Credits: It is used
when you cancel the job or
when the job is cancelled by
the device due to insufficient
credits (coin) or is canceled by
user’s request. If you select
Enable, the machine deposits
a credit equal to the number of
sheets that did not print out
correctly, then it prints next job
for free (for the amount
deposited). With Disable, even
if you cancel the printing job,
the machine includes jammed
paper in the count and the cost
of printing.
•Image Counter: Depends on
whether the machine counts
blank white pages.
OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION
Accounting
Method No Accounting It disables accounting features.
Network
Accounting You can set the network account
for users by using SyncThru™
Web Admin Service’s job
accounting plug-in. When the
users performs their copy, fax,
print, or scan service job with the
machine, the account module
records it. You can see the report
from the SyncThru™ Web Admin
Service.
Standard
Accounting You can set the local account for
maximum 500 users. When the
users perform their copy, fax,
print, or scan service job with the
machine, the account module
records it. You can see the report
from Standard Acct. Usage
Report in Machine Setup >
Admin Setting > Print/Report tab
> Accounting Reports.
As the device itself can manage
user’s ID and usage without any
remote server, this feature is
highly suitable for small and
medium businesses.
The accounting system
regards storing a file to a
single server as a single
count.
•Accounting ID List: It shows
the accounting ID list. You can
add, edit, or delete the ID.
•Login Setting: You can
configure for user to login
either with ID and password
(ID & password Login) or with
ID only (ID only Login).
•Accounting ID List: It shows
the accounting ID list. You can
add, edit, or delete the ID.
•Login Setting: You can
configure for user to login
either with ID and password
(ID & password Login) or with
ID only (ID only Login).
OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION
Machine status and advanced setup_90
User Authentication Method
If you are an administrator, you can enable authentication service before
using the machine to improve security for the device. If user
authentication service has been activated, only authorized users can
use the device. With authentication service, you also can give
permission to each user and set the maximum number of job executions
for a user.
The authentication service and accounting service can be enabled
independently. The services refer to the user information differently case
by case.
• Using Local Authentication only,
Using Local Authentication and Standard Accounting,
Using Local Authentication and Network Accounting: Refers to
User Profile from Security > User Access Control menu.
• Using Network Authentication only,
Using Network Authentication and Standard Accounting,
Using Network Authentication and Network Accounting: Refers
to the user information in the network authentication server. Disable
the user in User Profile to access the device.
•Standard Accounting only: Refers to the Standard Account List
from SyncThru™ Web Service > Security > User Access Control
> Accounting. (See "Managing your machine from the website" on
page 99.)
•Network Accounting only: Refers to the user information in network
authentication server.
Registering local authorized users
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service for your machine.
2. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
3. Select Security > User Access Control > Authentication >
Authentication Method.
4. Select Local Authentication.
5. Click on the Apply button.
6. Click on Authority, and check a Role Name according to the current
user’s role.
• You can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button.
7. Click on User Profile and check the users.
• You can add users by clicking the Add button.
• If you want add information to the Address Book, check the
Automatically add your information to Address Book.
• Select the user’s accounting ID if the accounting service is activated.
• Select the user’s role from Role item.
8. Click on Apply.
Register authorized network users
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
on Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
2. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
3. Select Security > User Access Control > Authentication >
Authentication Method.
4. Select Kerberos, SMB, or LDAP.
5. Click on the Apply button.
6. Click on Authority, and check the Role Name according to the
current user’s role.
• Users can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button.
7. Click on User Profile and check the users.
• You can create a new role group by clicking on the Add button.
• If you want add the information to Address Book, check the
Automatically add your information to Address Book option.
• Select the user’s accounting ID if the accounting service is activated.
• Select the user’s role from Role.
8. Click Apply.
Enabling network authentication by Kerberos
1. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
2. Select Security > Network Security > External Authentication
Server > Kerberos Server.
• Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers.
3. Enter the realm used for Kerberos login.
4. Select the IP Address or Host Name.
5. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
6. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 88.
7. You can add a backup domain as a previous step.
8. Click on Apply.
Enabling network authentication by SMB
1. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
2. Select Security > External Authentication Server > SMB Server.
• Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers.
3. Enter the domain that is used for SMB login.
4. Select IP Address or Host Name.
5. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
6. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 139.
7. Users can add a backup domain as in the previous step.
8. Click on Apply.
Enabling network authentication by LDAP
1. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
2. Select Security > Network Security > External Authentication
Server > LDAP Server.
• Click on the Add button if you want to add more servers.
3. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
4. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
5. Click Security > Network Security > External Authentication
Server > LDAP Server.
6. Select IP Address or Host Name.
7. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal notation or as a host name.
8. Enter the server port number, from 1 to 65535.
The default port number is 389.
9. Enter Search Root Directory, the top search level of the LDAP
directory tree.
10. Select Authentication method. There are two options for LDAP
server login:
Anonymous: This is used to bind with null password and login ID
Before configuring network authentication, you need to configure
External Authentication Server from Security > Network
Security
Users can add up to 6 alternate domains.
91 _Machine status and advanced setup
(Password and login ID are grayed out in SWS).
Simple: This is used to bind with the login ID and password in SWS.
11. Check the box next to Append Root to Base DN.
12. Select Match User’s Login ID to the following LDAP attribute
(options are CN, UID, or UserPrincipalName).
13. Enter your login name, password, maximum number of search
results, and search timeout.
14. Select Search Name Order.
15. Check the box next to "From:" Field Security Options.
16. Click on Apply.
User Accounting Method
Enabling Acccounting Method
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
2. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
3. Select Security > User Access Control > Accounting >
Accounting Method.
4. Select Standard Accounting.
5. Click on the Apply button.
Standard acccounting List
1. Enter your machine’s IP address as the URL in a browser and click
Go to access the SyncThru™ Web Service of your machine.
2. Log in to the SyncThru™ Web Service as an administrator. (See
"Managing your machine from the website" on page 99.)
3. Select Security > User Access Control > Accounting > Standard
Accounting List.
4. Select Standard Accounting.
5. Click on the Apply button.
Log
Change Admin. Password
You can change the password for the Admin Setting authentication.
Information Hiding
OPTIONAL SERVICE
When you want to add the optional features for this machine, you have to
install the optional kit and then set the machine to enable and activate those
features. Follow the next steps to enable those features.
LDAP Referral: LDAP client will search the referral server if the
LDAP server has no data to reply to the query and if the LDAP
server has a referral server.
This option is only provided if you have selected the Network
authentication option in the user authentication setting. You may
check this option if you want to search for information in a default
email address group.
If you want to allow users to login only with ID, then check
Authenticate with Login ID only.
You can add users to the accounting list by clicking on the Add
button. Enter a user’s ID, password and assign job limitation to
the user.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Job Log You can enable (or disable) job log to record job
processing results. You can print the records in
Machine Setup > Admin Setting > Print/Report tab
> Job Log Report.
Operation Log You can enable (or disable) operation log to record
various operations such as formatting the system,
creating document box, deleting file, etc. You can
print the records in Machine Setup > Admin Setting
> Print/Report tab > Operation Log Report.
Security Event
Log You can enable or disable security event log to record
history such as user authentication, software
upgrading, access log, exporting or importing data,
etc. You can print the records in Machine Setup >
Admin Setting > Print/Report tab > Security Event
Log Report.
OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION
Hiding Level
Setting Show All
Information All information in Job Status is
displayed to all users.
Show Non-
Secure
Information
Only
Non-secured information in Job
Status is displayed to all users.
The secured information, such as
secured received fax list or
secured print list, will be displayed
only to the owner.
Show Own
Information
Only
All information in Job Status is
displayed to the owner.
Hiding Method
Setting Char Counts Of
Information Instead of the job name and
owner's name in Job Status, you
can see a sequence of asterisks
(*) characters.
Fixed Counts
Except First
Char
The job name and owner’s name
in Job Status display as many as
entered number of asterisks (*)
except the first character.
Fixed Counts The job name and owner’s name
in Job Status display as many as
entered number of asterisks (*).
Machine status and advanced setup_92
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the Setup tab > Optional Service.
DOCUMENT BOX MANAGEMENT
You can set a person performing deletion of the public boxes in
User Box
.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the Setup tab > Document Box Management.
STANDARD WORKFLOW MANAGEMENT
You can set whether to use or not to use each features that standard
workflow provides.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the Setup tab > Standard Workflow Management.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Copy Enables or disables the Copy menu from the main
screen.
Analog Fax After installing the fax kit, select this option
Enable
to use this machine as a fax machine.
Scan to Email Enables or disables the Scan to Email menu from
the scan screen.
Scan to PC Set
Enable
to activate the scanning and sending it
via network.
Scan to SMB Enables or disables the Scan to SMB option from
the scan screen.
Scan to FTP Enables or disables the Scan to FTP option from
the scan screen.
Manual Image
Overwrite You can set the machine to delete previous job
information on HDD as you store new job
information. Set this option to
Enable
, go to the
General tab > Manual Image Overwrite, press
Start in the display to start the overwriting job.
Automatic Image
Overwrite If you select
Enable
, the machine renews the HDD
memory when you save new job on it.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Public Box
Deletion If you set this option to Administrators only, only
the administrator can delete the publicly stored
boxes in
User Box
, because the machine will asks
the password of administrator.
OPTION DESCRIPTION
Auto Redirection To create and execute a workform including the
auto redirection feature, enable this option.
Approve To create and execute a workform including the
approval feature, enable this option.
Complete Report To add a completion report in your workform,
enable this option.
Complete
Notification To add a completion notification in your workform,
enable this option.
Default Fax To create and execute a workform including the
fax feature, enable this option.
93 _Machine status and advanced setup
PRINTING A REPORT
You can print a report on the machine's configuration or font list, etc.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press OK.
3. Press the Print/Report tab.
OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION
Print You can print Network
Configuration, PS3 Font List,
PCL Font List and Schedule
Jobs Report. Schedule Jobs
Report shows the job list in
pending, in delayed faxing or the
Mailbox list as well.
Accounting
Reports Supplies
Information You can print the amount of each
category that your machine has
printed so far.
Network Auth.
Log Report It displays user login IDs and
emails.
Usage Page
Report You can print the report on the
amount of printouts depending on
the paper size and type.
Accounting
Report Prints the report of printing out
count for each login user.
Standard Acct.
Usage Report Prints the used amount of
Standard Accounting
Standard Acct.
Remain Report Prints the remained amount of
Standard Accounting
Report Configuration
Report You can print a report on the
machine's overall configuration.
Report
(Continue)
Fax Report
Fax Report You can set to print the
information of a fax reports.
•Multi Send Report: When you
fax to several destination, set
this option to print a
transmission report. On is to
print every time you send a
fax, the machine prints a
confirmation report. With On-
Error, only when the
transmission error occurred,
the report will be printed out.
•Fax Send Report
Appearance: You can select
whether the image on the
confirmation report shows or
not.
•Fax Sent/Received Report:
The machine stores the logs
on each transmission and
prints out every 50 logs with
this option On. It you select
Off, the machine stores the
logs but does not print.
•Fax Send Report: The
machine prints the
confirmation report after each
fax job, only when you send a
fax to one destination.
E-mail
Confirmation
Report
The report shows the job of
scanning and sending it via Scan
to Email.
•On: The report is printed
whether a job successfully
completed or failed.
•Off: No report is printed after
completing a job.
•On-Error: Only in case of error
occurrence, the machine prints
the report.
Scan to Server
Confirmation The report shows the job of
scanning and sending it via SMB
and FTP.
•On: The report is printed
whether a job successfully
completed or failed.
•Off: No report is printed after
completing a job.
•On-Error: Only in case of error
occurrence, the machine prints
the report.
You can also print machine's status information and browse status
with SyncThru™ Web Service. Open the web browser on your
networked computer and type the IP address of your machine.
When SyncThru™ Web Service opens, click Information > Print
information.
OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION
Maintenance_94
maintenance
This chapter provides information for maintaining your machine and the toner cartridge.
This chapter includes
• Printing a machine report
• Monitoring the supplies life
• Finding the serial number
• Sending the toner reorder notification
• Sending the imaging unit reorder notification
• Checking Document Box
• Cleaning your machine
• Maintaining the Toner cartridge
• Maintaining the imaging unit
• Maintenance Parts
• Managing your machine from the website
PRINTING A MACHINE REPORT
See "Printing a report" on page 93.
MONITORING THE SUPPLIES LIFE
If you want to view the supply life indicators, follow the next step.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press
Machine Status
.
3. Scroll down to browse the entire supplies list view the percentage
remaining.
FINDING THE SERIAL NUMBER
If you want to check your serial number from the screen, follow the next
steps.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press
Machine Status
> the
Machine Info
tab >
Machine Details
.
SENDING THE IMAGING UNIT REORDER
NOTIFICATION
You can set the machine to alert you that the life of the imaging unit is
almost over and needs to be reordered.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press
Admin Setting
. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press
OK
.
3. Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Imaging Unit
Reorder Notification.
4. Press Imaging Unit Low Alert to enable this option not, and press
Imaging Unit Low Alert Level to set the remained life level.
5. Press
OK
.
SENDING THE TONER REORDER
NOTIFICATION
You can set the machine to alert you that the toner level is low and needs to
be reordered.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press
Admin Setting
. When the login message pops up, then enter
password and press
OK
.
3. Press the General tab > Supplies Management > Toner Cartridge
Reorder Notification.
4. Press Toner Low Alert to enable this option not, and press Toner Low
Alert Level to set the remained life level.
5. Press
OK
.
CHECKING DOCUMENT BOX
The machine shows the document box list of the print or fax job.
Press Document Box on the Main screen. If the screen displays an other
menu, press ( ) to go to the Main screen.
•
User Box
tab: Create the box where you can save the document
such as the file you have printed, sent by email or scanned. When
you create a box, you can set the password to secure your box. The
box with a password is called Secured Box, and without it, it is
called public box.
•System Box tab: The machine provided default boxes, which you
cannot modify them.
•Type: Shows the box is secured or not.
•Box Name: Shows the box name.
•Owner: Shows the user name of a box.
•Date: Shows the date of a box created.
•File: Shows the number of total files in the box.
•Add: Lets you add more boxes.
•
Delete
: Deletes the selected box.
•Edit: Lets you to modify a box name and an owner name.
•
Detail
: Shows box information.
•Search: Searches a box with a box name or an owner name.
•Enter: Prints or sends the stored file in the box.
CLEANING YOUR MACHINE
To maintain print and scan quality, follow the cleaning procedures below
each time the toner cartridge is replaced or if print and scan quality
problems occur.
95 _Maintenance
Cleaning the outside
Clean the machine cabinet with a soft lint-free cloth. You can dampen the
cloth slightly with water, but be careful not to let any water drip onto or into
the machine.
Cleaning the inside
Contact a service representative to clean the inside of the machine.
Cleaning the transfer unit
The cleaning the transfer unit within this machine is recommended for its
printing quality. The cleaning period is best once a year or once 10,000
pages printing.
1. Prepare a soft lint-free cloth.
2. Turn off the machine.
3. Unplug the power cable.
4. Open the side cover.
5. Wipe the surface of the transfer unit.
6. Close the side cover.
7. Plug the power cable and turn the machine on.
Cleaning the scan unit
Keeping the scan unit clean helps ensure the best possible copies. We
suggest that you clean the scan unit at the start of each day and during the
day, as needed.
1. Slightly dampen a soft lint-free cloth or paper towel with water.
2. Open the scanner lid.
3. Wipe the surface of the scanner glass and DADF glass until it is clean
and dry.
4. Wipe the underside of the scanner lid and white sheet until it is clean
and dry.
5. Close the scanner lid.
MAINTAINING THE TONER CARTRIDGE
Toner cartridge storage
Toner cartridges contain components that are sensitive to light,
temperature, and humidity. Samsung suggests users follow the
recommendations to ensure the optimum performance, highest quality, and
longest life from your new Samsung toner cartridge.
Store this cartridge in the same environment as the printer it will be used in;
this should be in controlled office temperature and humidity conditions. The
toner cartridge should remain in its original, unopened package until
installation – If original packaging is not available, cover the top opening of
the cartridge with paper and store in a dark cabinet.
Opening the cartridge package prior to use dramatically shortens its useful
shelf and operating life. Do not store on the floor. If the toner cartridge is
removed from the printer, always store the cartridge:
• Inside the protective bag from the original package
• Correct side up in a horizontal position (not standing on end)
• Do not store consumables in;
- Temperature greater than 40°C (104°F).
- Humidity range less than 20% and not greater than 80%.
- An environment with extreme changes in humidity or temperature.
- Direct sunlight or room light.
- Dusty places.
- A car for a long period of time.
- An environment where corrosive gases are present.
- An environment with salty air.
• Cleaning the cabinet of the machine with cleaning materials
containing large amounts of alcohol, solvent, or other strong
substances can discolor or distort the cabinet.
• If your machine or its surrounding is contaminated with toner, we
recommend you to use cloth or tissue dampened with water to
clean it. If you use a vacuum cleaner, toner blows in the air and
might be harmful to you.
1white sheet
2DADF glass
3scanner lid
4scanner glass
Maintenance_96
Handling instructions
• Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum in the cartridge.
• Do not expose the cartridge to unnecessary vibrations or shock.
• Never manually rotate the drum, especially in the reverse direction; this
can cause internal damage and toner spillage.
Use of non-Samsung and refilled toner cartridge
Samsung Electronics does not recommend or approve the use of non-
Samsung brand toner cartridges in your printer including generic, store
brand, refilled, or remanufactured toner cartridges.
Estimated cartridge life
Estimated cartridge life (the life of the toner cartridge yield) depends on the
amount of toner that print jobs require. The actual print-out number may
vary depending on the print density of the pages you print on, operating
environment, printing interval, media type, and/or media size. For example,
if you print a lot of graphics, the consumption of the toner is high and you
may need to change the cartridge more often.
Replacing the toner cartridge
When the toner cartridge is completely empty:
•Toner is empty. Replace toner cartridg appears on the display.
• The machine stops printing. Incoming faxes are saved in memory.
At this stage, the toner cartridge needs to be replaced.Check the type of the
toner cartridge for your machine. (See "Supplies" on page 121.)
1. Open the side cover.
2. Open the front cover.
3. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the right until you hear a 'click', to
release the toner cartridge.
4. Lift the locking lever and pull the toner cartridge out.
5. Remove the new toner cartridge from its bag.
6. Thoroughly roll the cartridge five or six times to distribute the toner
evenly inside the cartridge.
Samsung’s printer warranty does not cover damage to the machine
caused by the use of a refilled, remanufactured, or non-Samsung
brand toner cartridge.
97 _Maintenance
7. Hold the toner cartridge by the handle and slowly insert the cartridge into
the opening in the machine.
8. Slide the new toner cartridge in until it locks in place.
9. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the left until you hear a 'click'.
10. Close the front cover, then the side cover.
MAINTAINING THE IMAGING UNIT
Expected cartridge life
The useful life of the imaging unit is approximately 80,000 pages. The
screen displays Imaging unit is worn. Replace with new one when the life
of the imaging unit is almost ended. Approximately 6,000 more pages can
be made after the warning message related to the imaging unit, but you
should have a replacement imaging unit in stock. Imaging unit yield may be
affected by the operating environment, optional, printing interval, media type
and media size.
•Imaging unit is worn. Replace with new one appears on the display.
For ordering information for imaging unit. (See "Supplies" on page 121.)
Replacing the imaging unit
1. Open the side cover.
2. Open the front cover.
3. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the right until you hear a 'click', to
release the toner cartridge.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash
clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
After replacing the toner cartridge, wait for several minutes without
powering off until the machine enters to standby mode. Otherwise it
may cause malfunction of the machine.
To prevent damage to the imaging unit, do not expose it to light for
more than a few minutes.
Maintenance_98
4. Lift the locking lever and pull the toner cartridge out.
5. Pull the used imaging unit out.
6. Remove the new imaging unit from its bag.
7. Open the carefully pull the seal tape out of the cartridge.
8. Thoroughly shake the imaging unit side to side five or six times.
9. Unpack the new imaging unit and slide it into place, making sure not to
touch the surface of the imaging unit.
10. Slide the toner cartridge in until it locks in place.
11. Turn the cartridge locking lever toward the left until you hear a 'click'.
12. Close the front cover, then the side cover.
The toner cartridge must be removed to replace the imaging unit.
If toner gets on your clothing, wipe it off with a dry cloth and wash
clothing in cold water. Hot water sets toner into fabric.
Do not touch the green part, midside of the imaging unit. Use the
handle on the cartridge to avoid touching this area.
After replacing the toner cartridge, wait for several minutes without
powering off until the machine enters to standby mode. Otherwise it
may cause malfunction of the machine.
99 _Maintenance
MAINTENANCE PARTS
To avoid print quality and paper feed problems resulting from worn parts
and to maintain your machine in top working condition the following items
will need to be replaced after the specified number of pages or when the life
span of each item has expired.
We highly recommend that this maintenance be performed by an authorized
service provider, dealer or the retailer where you bought the machine. The
warranty does not cover the replacement of the maintenance parts after
their lifespan.
MANAGING YOUR MACHINE FROM THE
WEBSITE
If you have connected your machine to a network and set up TCP/IP
network parameters correctly, you can manage the machine via Samsung’s
SyncThru™ Web Service, an embedded web server. Use SyncThru™
Web Service to:
• View the machine’s device information and check its current status.
• Change TCP/IP parameters and set up other network parameters.
• Change the printer properties.
• Set the machine to send email notifications to let you know the
machine’s status.
• Get support for using the machine.
To access SyncThru™ Web Service:
1. Start a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, from Windows.
2. Enter the machine IP address (http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx) in the address
field and press the Enter key or click Go.
Your machine’s embedded website opens.
ITEMS YIELD (AVERAGE)
DADF rubber pad Approx. 50,000 pages
Multi-purpose tray rubber pad Approx. 50,000 pages
DADF feed roller Approx. 250,000 pages
Multi-purpose tray feed roller Approx. 200,000 pages
Transfer roller Approx. 125,000 pages
Fuser unit Approx. 250,000 pages
Paper Feed roller Approx. 250,000 pages
SyncThru™ Web Service allows administrator to set up the
machine. If you want to access Settings or Security menu, login
first. Press Login button, and enter user ID and password from the
pop-up window. Then press LOGIN button.
The initial administrator’s setting is as follows:
• The default ID: admin
• The default password: sec00000
Troubleshooting_ 100
troubleshooting
This chapter gives helpful information for what to do if you encounter an error.
This chapter includes:
• Tips for avoiding paper jams
• Clearing document jams
• Clearing paper jams
• Understanding display messages
• Solving other problems
TIPS FOR AVOIDING PAPER JAMS
By selecting the correct media types, most paper jams can be avoided.
When a paper jam occurs, follow the steps outlined on page 100.
• Ensure that the adjustable guides are positioned correctly. (see
"Loading paper" on page 38)
• Do not overload the tray. Ensure that the paper level is below the paper
capacity mark on the inside of the tray.
• Do not remove paper from the tray while your machine is printing.
• Flex, fan, and straighten paper before loading.
• Do not use creased, damp, or highly curled paper.
• Do not mix paper types in a tray.
• Use only recommended print media. (See "Setting the paper size and
type" on page 40.)
• Ensure that the recommended side of the print media is facing down in
the tray, or facing down in the multi-purpose tray.
• If paper jams occur frequently when you print on A5/B5-sized paper:
Load the paper into the tray with the long edge facing the front of the
tray. If load the paper this way, printing both sides of the paper (Duplex)
is not supported.
In the printer properties window, set the page orientation to be rotated
90 degrees. See Software section.
CLEARING DOCUMENT JAMS
When an original jams while passing through the DADF, the warming
message appears on the display screen.
1. Remove any remaining pages from the DADF.
2. Open the DADF cover.
3. Gently remove the jammed paper from the DADF.
4. Close the DADF cover. Then reload the pages you removed, if any, in
the DADF.
To avoid tearing the document, remove the jammed document gently
and slowly.
To prevent document jams, use the scanner glass for thick, thin, or
mixed paper-type originals.
If you see no paper in this area, refer to Roller misfeed. (See
"Roller misfeed" on page 101.)
101 _Troubleshooting
Misfeed of exiting paper
1. Remove the remaining documents from the DADF.
2. Open the DADF cover.
3. Open the document input tray upwards and pull the document gently out
of the DADF.
4. Close the DADF cover and the document input tray. Then place the
documents back in the DADF.
Roller misfeed
1. Open the scanner lid.
2. Grasp the misfeed paper, and remove the paper from the feed area by
carefully pulling it to the right using both hands.
If you do not see the paper in this area, stop and go to step 3.
3. Open the white document background.
4. Remove the paper from the feed area by carefully pulling.
1scanner lid
Troubleshooting_ 102
5. Close the white document background and the scanner lid. Then load
the removed pages back into the DADF.
CLEARING PAPER JAMS
When a paper jam occurs, the warming message appears on the display
screen. Refer to the table below to locate and clear the paper jam.
In the tray 1
1. Pull out the paper tray to open. After you pull it out completely, lift the
front part of the tray up slightly to release the tray from the machine.
2. Remove the jammed paper by gently pulling it straight out.
Once you remove the jammed paper here, open the side cover and then
close it to clear the error message on the display.
If there is any resistance, and the paper does not move immediately when
you pull, stop pulling. Then:
3. Open the side cover.
MESSAGE LOCATION OF JAM GO TO
Paper Jam in tray 1,
Paper Jam in tray 2,
Paper Jam in tray 2
(HCF),
Paper Jam in tray 3,
Paper Jam in tray 3
(HCF),
Paper Jam in tray 4,
Paper Jam in MP
tray
In the paper feed area
(tray 1, optional tray, or
multi-purpose tray)
See "In the multi-
purpose tray" on
page 106.
See "In the optional
tray" on page 103.
See "In the optional
high capacity
feeder" on page 104.
Paper Jam in exit
area In the fuser area or
around the toner
cartridge
See "In the fuser area
or around the toner
cartridge" on page 106.
Paper Jam inside of
machine In the paper exit area See "In the paper exit
area" on page 106.
Paper Jam at the
bottom of duplex
path,
Paper Jam at the
top of duplex path,
Paper Jam inside of
duplex path
In the duplex unit See "In the duplex unit
area" on page 107.
Paper jam in front of
finisher In the stacker unit See "Paper jam in front
of finisher" on
page 107.
Paper jam inside
finisher, Paper jam
inside finisher’s
duplex
In the stacker unit See "Paper jam inside
finisher, Paper jam
inside finisher’s
duplex" on page 107.
Paper jam at exit of
finisher In the stacker unit See "Paper jam at exit
of finisher" on
page 108.
To avoid tearing the paper, pull the jammed paper out gently and
slowly. Follow the instructions in the following sections to clear the
jam.
103 _Troubleshooting
4. Carefully remove the misfeed paper in the direction shown.
5. Close the side cover and insert the paper tray. Lower the rear part of the
Tray to align the rear edge with the corresponding slot of the machine,
then insert it completely.
In the optional tray
1. Open the outer cover in tray 2.
2. Open the inner cover of tray 2.
3. Pull the jammed paper out in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the
paper, pull it out gently and slowly.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper
Do not touch the shiny imaging unit surface. Scratches or smudges
will result in poor print quality. This part explains the method of removing the jammed paper in the
optional tray 2. Please refer to the next method for other optional trays,
since the method is same as the tray 2.
Troubleshooting_ 104
in this area, stop and go to step 4.
4. Pull out the optional tray 2.
5. Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the
machine.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper
in this area, stop and go to step 6.
6. Remove the paper in the direction shown. To avoid tearing the paper,
pull it out gently and slowly.
7. Insert the tray 2 and close the two covers.
In the optional high capacity feeder
1. Open the outer cover of the high capacity feeder.
2. Open the inner cover of the high capacity feeder.
105 _Troubleshooting
3. Pull the jammed paper out, in the direction shown, pulling gently and
slowly in order to avoid tearing the paper.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper
in this area, stop and go to step 4.
4. Pull out the optional high capacity feeder.
5. Lift the front part of the tray slightly up to release the tray from the
machine.
If the paper does not move when you pull, or if you do not see the paper
in this area, stop and go to step 6.
If you do not see any paper in this area, stop and go to step 6.
6. Remove the paper in the direction shown. Pull it out gently and slowly in
order to avoid tearing the paper.
7. Insert the optional high capacity feeder and close the two covers.
Troubleshooting_ 106
In the multi-purpose tray
1. If the paper is not feeding properly, pull the paper out of the machine.
2. Open and close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.
In the fuser area or around the toner cartridge
1. Open the side cover.
2. Remove the jammed paper, in the direction shown.
3. Close the side cover.
In the paper exit area
1. Open the side cover.
2. Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.
3. Close the side cover. Printing automatically resumes.
The fuser area is hot. Take care when removing paper from the
machine.
107 _Troubleshooting
In the duplex unit area
If the duplex unit is not inserted correctly, paper jam may occur. Make sure
that the duplex unit is inserted correctly.
1. Open the side cover.
2. Release the guide to pull the jammed paper easily.
3. Remove the jammed paper.
4. Close the side cover.
In the stacker (finisher)
Paper jam in front of finisher
1. Open the stacker front cover.
2. Press the right part of lever (1c) and hold still, then push the stacker
to the left to release the stacker.
3. Remove the jammed paper.
4. Slide in the stacker until you hear the sound ‘click’.
5. Close the stacker front cover.
Paper jam inside finisher, Paper jam inside finisher’s
duplex
1. Open the stacker front cover.
2. Pull the stacker lever 1a down. If necessary, pull the stacker lever 1b
down as well.
Troubleshooting_ 108
3. Remove the jammed paper.
4. Pull up on the stacker lever and then close the stacker front cover.
Paper jam at exit of finisher
1. Gently pull the paper out through the exit area.
UNDERSTANDING DISPLAY MESSAGES
Messages appear on the Smart Panel program window or on the control
panel display to indicate machine status or errors. Refer to the tables below
to understand the messages meaning to correct the problem, if necessary.
Messages and their explanations are listed in alphabetical order.
.
• If the message is not in the table, cycle the power and try the
printing job again. If the problem persists, call for service.
• When you call for service, it is very convenient to provide the
service representative with the contents of display message.
• Some messages may not appear in the display depending on
options or models.
• [yyy] indicates the part of the machine.
• [zzz] indicates the error code. When you contact the service
center, this error code help to handle the problem.
• You may see an exclamation mark ( ) or a cross mark ( ) on
the upper left of the display, in that case, press the question mark
to browse detailed information on the supplies.
MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
[yyy] is worn.
Replace with new
one
The life of the part
expires totally. Replace the part with a
new one. Call for
service.
DC motor does not
operate: [zzz].
Please turn off then
on
There is a problem in
the control of DC
motor unit.
Turn the machine off
and turn it on again. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.
Did not supply
enough toner.
Remove seal tape &
reinstall
Not supplied toner to
the imaging unit. • Remove the sealing
tape from the
imaging unit.
• Thoroughly roll the
toner cartridge five or
six times, and
reinstall it.
• Turn the machine off
and turn it on again.
Did not supply
enough toner.
Please open/close
door
The machine received
several papers with
many images, and it
cannot supply the
toner properly.
Open side door and
close it. If the problem
still persists, please call
for service.
Fax memory is
almost full. Print or
remove received fax
Job
There is no more
available fax memory.
No more fax data can
be received.
Delete the received fax
data in the memory to
secure memory. Call
for service.
Fax memory is full.
Print or remove
received fax Job
Available fax memory
is now 1MB. Delete the received fax
data in the memory to
secure memory. Call
for service.
Finisher door is
open. Close it The finisher cover is
not securely latched. Close the finisher until it
locks into place.
109 _Troubleshooting
Finisher error: [zzz].
Please turn off then
on
There is a problem in
the finisher unit. Turn the machine off
and reinstall the finisher
again. Check that the
finisher cable is
connected properly. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.
Fuser error: [zzz].
Please turn off then
on
There is a problem in
the fuser unit working. Turn the machine off
and turn it on again. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.
Fuser unit is not
installed correctly.
Install it
The fuser unit is not
installed or correctly. Install the fuser unit.
Call for service.
Imaging unit is
empty. Replace it The toner in the
imaging unit has run
out.
Replace the imaging
unit with a Samsung-
genuine toner cartridge.
(See "Replacing the
imaging unit" on
page 97.)
Imaging unit is not
compatible. Check
user’s guide
The imaging unit you
have installed is not
for your machine.
Install a Samsung-
genuine imaging unit,
designed for your
machine.
Imaging unit is not
installed. Install it The imaging unit is
not installed, or the
CRUM (Consumer
Replaceable Unit
Monitor) in the
cartridge is not
connected.
Install the imaging unit.
If it is already installed,
try to reinstall the
imaging unit.
If the problem persists,
please call for service.
Imaging unit is
worn. Replace with
new one
The imaging unit is at
the end of its life.
When the imaging unit
replacement message
appears on the screen
and if you select
Continue, this
message displays.
Replace a imaging unit
with a Samsung-
genuine imaging unit.
(See "Replacing the
imaging unit" on
page 97.)
LSU error: [zzz].
Please turn off then
on
There is a problem in
the control of LSU
unit.
Turn the machine off
and turn it on again. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.
Motor does not
operate: [zzz].
Please turn off then
on
There is a problem in
the control of motor
unit.
Turn the machine off
and turn it on again. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.
Original paper does
not feed in scanner The lead edge of the
document failed to
actuate the scan
sensor within the
correct time after
actuating the
registration sensor.
Open the DADF cover
and remove jammed
original. (See "Clearing
document jams" on
page 100.)
MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
Original paper is too
long for scanner.
Check size
Oversized document
or double-feeding of
originals.
Open the DADF cover
and remove the
jammed original. (See
"Clearing document
jams" on page 100.)
Check the document
size whether it is
supported. (See "DADF
document size" on
page 126.)
Original paper jam
in front of scanner The originals are
jammed in DADF. Open the DADF cover
and remove the
jammed original. (See
"Clearing document
jams" on page 100.)
Original paper jam
in front of scanner
duplex path
Paper has jammed
during duplex printing
in the DADF.
Clear the jam. (See
"Clearing document
jams" on page 100.)
Original paper jam
inside of scanner The lead edge of the
document failed to
actuate the gate
sensor within the
correct time after
actuating the scan
sensor.
When the machine is
on, jammed paper is
detected in the DADF.
Open the DADF cover
and remove the
jammed original. (See
"Clearing document
jams" on page 100.)
Original paper jam
while reversing
paper in scanner
The lead edge of the
document failed to
actuate the duplex
sensor within the
correct time when the
document was fed the
wrong way.
Lift up the document
input tray and remove
the jammed original.
(See "Clearing
document jams" on
page 100.)
Paper jam at exit of
finisher Paper jammed in the
stacker exit part. Pull jammed paper
from the stacker exit.
Paper Jam at the
bottom of duplex
path
Paper has jammed
during duplex printing. Clear the jam. (See "In
the duplex unit area" on
page 107.)
Paper Jam at the top
of duplex path
Paper Jam in exit
area Paper has jammed in
the fuser area. Clear the jam. (See "In
the fuser area or
around the toner
cartridge" on
page 106.)
Paper jam in front of
finisher Paper jammed in the
stacker. Open the stacker door
and remove jammed
paper by lowering
guide 1a or 1b.
Paper jam inside
finisher
MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
Troubleshooting_ 110
Paper Jam in MP
tray Paper Misfed from
multi-purpose tray Clear the jam. (See "In
the multi-purpose
tray" on page 106.)
Paper Jam in tray 1 Paper misfed from
tray
Or paper has jammed
in the tray feed area.
Or the tray cover is
opened.
Clear the jam. (See "In
the tray 1" on page 102
and see "In the optional
tray" on page 103 and
see "In the optional
high capacity
feeder" on page 104)
Paper Jam in tray 2
Paper Jam in tray 2
(HCF)
Paper Jam in tray 3
Paper Jam in tray 3
(HCF)
Paper Jam in tray 4
Paper jam inside
finisher’s duplex Paper jammed in the
stacker. Open the stacker door
and remove jammed
paper by lowering
guide 1a or 1b.
Paper Jam inside of
duplex path Paper has jammed
during duplex printing. Clear the jam. (See "In
the duplex unit area" on
page 107.)
Paper Jam inside of
machine Paper has jammed in
the registration area. Clear the jam. (See "In
the paper exit area" on
page 106.)
Scanner locking
switch is locked or
another problem
occurred
The CCD (Charged
Couple Device) lock
has been locked. The
CCD does not detect
its home location or
move.
Unlock the CCD lock.
(See "Front view" on
page 18.) Or turn off
the machine and on
again. Try again. If the
problem persists, call
for service.
Shake toner
cartridge The toner supply is
low. Thoroughly roll the new
cartridge five or six
times to distribute the
toner evenly inside the
cartridge.
Staple cartridge is
empty. Replace it Stapler is run out. Order Staple Cartridge.
(See "Staple
Cartridge" on
page 121.) And replace
it. (See "Replacing the
Stapler" on page 124.)
MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
Staple cartridge is
not installed. Install
it in finisher
The staple cartridge is
not installed. Install the staple
cartridge following the
steps explained on the
back of the finisher
door. (See "Replacing
the Stapler" on
page 124.) If you want
to continue the print job
and disregard of this
error message, go to
Admin Setting to
adjust the option. (See
"General settings" on
page 84.)
System error: [zzz].
Please turn off then
on
There is a problem in
the system operation. Turn the machine off
and turn it on again. If
the problem persists,
please call for service.
This IP address
conflicts with an IP
address already in
use. Check it
The IP address is
used in other place
elsewhere.
Check the IP address
or obtain a new IP
address.
Toner cartridge is
not compatible.
Check user’s guide
The toner cartridge
you have installed is
not for your machine.
Install a Samsung-
genuine toner cartridge,
designed for your
machine.
Toner cartridge is
not installed. Install
it
The toner cartridge is
not installed or the
CRUM (Consumer
Replaceable Unit
Monitor) in the
cartridge is not
properly connected.
Try to reinstall the toner
cartridge.
Toner cartridge is
worn. Replace with
new one
The toner cartridge is
at the end of its life.
When the toner
cartridge replacement
message appears on
the screen and if you
select Continue, this
message displays.
Rplace a toner
cartridge with a
Samsung-genuine
toner cartridge. (See
"Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 96.)
Toner is empty.
Replace toner
cartridge
The lifespan of the
toner cartridge which
the arrow indicates is
reached.
This message appears
when the toner is
completely empty, and
your machine stops
printing. Replace the
toner cartridge with a
Samsung-genuine
toner cartridge. (See
"Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 96.)
Toner is low. Order
new toner cartridge The toner cartridge is
almost empty. Ensure a replacement
cartridge is in stock.
Too much paper in
finisher stacker.
Remove printed
paper
The stacker is full of
printouts. Remove printouts from
the stacker.
MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
111 _Troubleshooting
SOLVING OTHER PROBLEMS
The following chart lists some conditions that may occur and the
recommended solutions. Follow the suggested solutions until the problem is
corrected. If the problem persists, please call for service.
Touch screen problem
Paper feeding problems
Too much paper in
output bin tray.
Remove printed
paper
The printed papers
are full on the output
tray.
Remove printed outs
from the output tray.
Use Auxiliary
Access The credit is not
enough to access the
job according to
Foreign Device.
Insert credit into the
Foreign Device.
MESSAGE MEANING SUGGESTED
SOLUTIONS
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The touch screen
does not show
anything.
Turn the machine off and turn it on again. If the
problem persists, please call for service.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Paper is jammed
during printing. Clear the paper jam. (See "Clearing paper
jams" on page 102.)
Paper sticks
together. • Check the maximum paper capacity of the tray.
(See "Specification on print media" on
page 35.)
• Make sure that you are using the correct type
of paper. (See "Specification on print
media" on page 35.)
• Remove paper from the tray and flex or fan the
paper.
• Humid conditions may cause some paper to
stick together.
Multiple sheets of
paper do not feed. • Different types of paper may be stacked in the
tray. Load paper of only one type, size, and
weight.
• If multiple sheets have caused a paper jam,
clear the paper jam. (See "Clearing paper
jams" on page 102.)
Paper does not feed
into the machine. • Remove any obstructions from inside the
machine.
• Paper has not been loaded correctly. Remove
paper from the tray and reload it correctly.
• There is too much paper in the tray. Remove
excess paper from the tray.
• The paper is too thick. Use only paper that
meets the specifications required by the
machine. (See "Specification on print
media" on page 35.)
• If an original does not feed into the machine,
the DADF rubber pad may require to be
replaced. Contact a service representative.
Troubleshooting_ 112
Printing problems
The paper keeps
jamming. • There is too much paper in the tray. Remove
excess paper from the tray. If you are printing
on special materials, use the multi-purpose
tray.
• An incorrect type of paper is being used. Use
only paper that meets the specifications
required by the machine. (See "Specification
on print media" on page 35.)
• There may be debris inside the machine. Open
the front cover and remove the debris.
• If an original does not feed into the machine,
the DADF rubber pad may need to be
replaced. Contact a service representative.
Transparencies
stick together in the
paper exit.
Use only transparencies specifically designed for
laser printers. Remove each transparency as it
exits from the machine.
Envelopes skew or
fail to feed correctly. Ensure that the paper guides are against both
sides of the envelopes.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The machine
does not print. The machine is not
receiving power. Check the power cord
connections. Check the
power switch and the power
source.
The machine is not
selected as the
default printer.
Select Samsung SCX-6545
Series PCL 6 (or Samsung
SCX-6545 Series PS) as
your default printer in your
Windows.
Check the machine for the following:
• The side cover is not closed. Close the side
cover.
• Paper is jammed. Clear the paper jam. (See
"Clearing paper jams" on page 102.)
• No paper is loaded. Load paper. (See "Loading
paper" on page 38.)
• The toner cartridge or the imaging unit is not
installed. Install the toner cartridge or the imaging
unit.
If a system error occurs, contact your service
representative.
The connection
cable between the
computer and the
machine is not
connected properly.
Disconnect the printer cable
and reconnect it.
The connection
cable between the
computer and the
machine is
defective.
If possible, attach the cable
to another computer that is
working properly and print a
job. You can also try using a
different printer cable.
The port setting is
incorrect. Check the Windows printer
setting to make sure that the
print job is sent to the correct
port. If the computer has
more than one port, make
sure that the machine is
attached to the correct one.
The machine may
be configured
incorrectly.
Check the printer properties
to ensure that all of the print
settings are correct.
The printer driver
may be incorrectly
installed.
Repair the printer software.
See Software section.
The machine is
malfunctioning. Check the display message
on the control panel to see if
the machine is indicating a
system error. Contact a
service representative.
113 _Troubleshooting
The machine
does not print.
(Continued)
The document size
is so big that the
hard disk space of
the computer is not
enough to access
the print job.
Get more hard disk space
and print the document
again.
The machine
selects print
materials from
the wrong paper
source.
The paper option
that was selected in
the printer properties
may be incorrect.
For many software
applications, the paper
source selection is found
under the Paper
tab within
the printer properties. Select
the correct paper source.
See the printer driver help
screen.
A print job is
extremely slow. The job may be very
complex. Reduce the complexity of the
page or try adjusting the print
quality settings.
Half the page is
blank. The page orientation
setting may be
incorrect.
Change the page orientation
in your application. See the
printer driver help screen.
The paper size and
the paper size
settings do not
match.
Ensure that the paper size in
the printer driver settings
matches the paper in the
tray.
Or, ensure that the paper
size in the printer driver
settings matches the paper
selection in the software
application settings you use.
The machine
prints, but the
text is wrong,
garbled, or
incomplete.
The printer cable is
loose or defective. Disconnect the printer cable
and reconnect. Try a print job
that you have already printed
successfully. If possible,
attach the cable and the
machine to another computer
and try a print job that you
know works. Finally, try a
new printer cable.
The wrong printer
driver was selected. Check the application’s
printer selection menu to
ensure that your machine is
selected.
The software
application is
malfunctioning.
Try printing a job from
another application.
The operating
system is
malfunctioning.
Exit Windows and reboot the
computer. Turn the machine
off and then back on again.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Pages print, but
they are blank. The toner cartridge
is defective or out of
toner.
Redistribute the toner, if
necessary.
If necessary, replace the
toner cartridge.
The file may have
blank pages. Check the file to ensure that
it does not contain blank
pages.
Some parts, such as
the controller or the
board, may be
defective.
Contact a service
representative.
The printer does
not print PDF file
correctly. Some
parts of
graphics, text, or
illustrations are
missing.
Incompatibility
between the PDF
file and the Acrobat
products.
Printing the PDF file as an
image may enable the file to
print. Turn on
Print As Image
from the Acrobat printing
options.
It will take longer to
print when you print a
PDF file as an image.
Your machine
has an odd smell
during initial
use.
The oil used to
protect the fuser is
evaporating.
After printing about 100 color
pages, there will be no more
smell. It is a temporary issue.
The print quality
of photos is not
good. Images
are not clear.
The resolution of the
photo is very low. Reduce the photo size. If you
increase the photo size in the
software application, the
resolution will be reduced.
The machine
prints, but the
text is wrong,
garbled, or
incomplete.
If you are under the
DOS environment,
the font setting for
your machine may
be set incorrectly.
Suggested solutions: Change
the language setting. (See
"Changing the display
language" on page 29.)
Before printing,
the machine
emits vapor near
the output tray.
Using damp paper
can cause vapor
during printing.
This is not a problem. Just
keep printing.
CONDITION
POSSIBLE CAUSE
SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Troubleshooting_ 114
Printing quality problems
If the inside of the machine is dirty or paper has been loaded improperly,
you may notice a reduction in print quality. See the table below to clear the
problem.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Light or faded print
If a vertical white streak or faded area appears
on the page:
• The toner supply is low. You may be able
to temporarily extend the toner cartridge
life. If this does not improve the print
quality, install a new toner cartridge.
• The paper may not meet paper
specifications; for example, the paper may
be too moist or rough. (See "Specification
on print media" on page 35.)
• If the entire page is light, the print
resolution setting is too low or the toner
save mode is on. Adjust the print resolution
and turn the toner save mode off. See the
help screen of the printer driver and refer to
Software section, respectively.
• A combination of faded or smeared defects
may indicate that the toner cartridge needs
cleaning. Contact a service representative.
• The surface of the LSU part inside the
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU,
contact a service representative.
Toner specks
• The paper may not meet specifications; for
example, the paper may be too moist or
rough. (See "Specification on print
media" on page 35.)
• The transfer roller may be dirty. Clean the
inside of your machine. Contact a service
representative.
• The paper path may need cleaning. Contact
a service representative.
Dropouts
If faded areas, generally rounded, occur
randomly on the page:
• A single sheet of paper may be defective.
Try reprinting the job.
• The moisture content of the paper is
uneven or the paper has moist spots on its
surface. Try a different brand of paper.
(See "Specification on print media" on
page 35.)
• The paper lot is bad. The manufacturing
processes can cause some areas to reject
toner. Try a different kind or brand of
paper.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go
to printer properties, click Paper tab, and
set type to Thick Paper. Refer to the
Software section for details.
• If these steps do not correct the problem,
contact a service representative.
White Spots White spots appears on the page:
• The paper is too rough and a lot of dirt from
a paper falls to the inner devices within the
machine, so the transfer roller may be dirty.
Clean the inside of your machine. (See
"Cleaning the transfer unit" on page 95.)
Contact a service representative.
• The paper path may need cleaning.
Contact a service representative.
Vertical lines
If black vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface(drum part) of the imaging unit
inside the machine has probably been
scratched. Remove the imaging unit and
install a new one. (See "Replacing the
imaging unit" on page 97.)
If white vertical streaks appear on the page:
• The surface of the LSU part inside the
machine may be dirty. Clean the LSU.
Contact a service representative.
Color or Black
background
If the amount of background shading becomes
unacceptable:
• Change to a lighter weight paper. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 35.)
• Check the environmental conditions: very
dry conditions (low humidity) or a high level
of humidity (higher than 80% RH) can
increase the amount of background
shading.
• Remove the old imaging unit and then,
install a new one. (See "Replacing the
imaging unit" on page 97.)
Toner smear
• Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a
service representative.
• Check the paper type and quality. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 35.)
• Remove the imaging unit and then, install a
new one. (See "Replacing the imaging
unit" on page 97.)
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
115 _Troubleshooting
Vertical repetitive
defects
If marks repeatedly appear on the printed side
of the page at even intervals:
• The imaging unit may be damaged. If a
repetitive mark occurs on the page, run a
cleaning sheet through several times to
clean the cartridge; contact a service
representative. After the printout, if you still
have the same problems, remove the
imaging unit and then, install a new one.
(See "Replacing the imaging unit" on
page 97.)
• Parts of the machine may have toner on
them. If the defects occur on the back of
the page, the problem will likely correct
itself after a few more pages.
• The fusing assembly may be damaged.
Contact a service representative.
Background scatter
Background scatter results from bits of toner
randomly distributed on the printed page.
• The paper may be too damp. Try printing
with a different batch of paper. Do not open
packages of paper until necessary so that
the paper does not absorb too much
moisture.
• If background scatter occurs on an
envelope, change the printing layout to
avoid printing over areas that have
overlapping seams on the reverse side.
Printing on seams can cause problems.
• If background scatter covers the entire
surface area of a printed page, adjust the
print resolution through your software
application or in printer properties.
Misformed
characters
• If characters are improperly formed and
producing hollow images, the paper stock
may be too slick. Try different paper. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 35.)
• If characters are improperly formed and
producing a wavy effect, the scanner unit
may need service. Contact a service
representative.
Page skew
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 35.)
• Ensure that the paper or other material is
loaded correctly and the guides are not too
tight or too loose against the paper stack.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
A
Curl or wave
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality. Both high
temperature and humidity can cause paper
curl. (See "Specification on print media" on
page 35.)
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Wrinkles or creases
• Ensure that the paper is loaded properly.
• Check the paper type and quality. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 35.)
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray. Also
try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
Back of printouts
are dirty
Check for leaking toner. Clean the inside of the
machine. Contact a service representative.
Solid Color or
Black pages
• The imaging unit may not be installed
properly. Remove the cartridge and reinsert
it.
• The imaging unit may be defective and need
replacing. Remove the imaging unit and
install a new one. (See "Replacing the
imaging unit" on page 97.)
• The machine may require repair. Contact a
service representative.
Loose toner
• Clean the inside of the machine. Contact a
service representative.
• Check the paper type and quality. (See
"Specification on print media" on page 35.)
• Remove the imaging unit and then, install a
new one. (See "Replacing the imaging
unit" on page 97.)
• If the problem persists, the machine may
require repair. Contact a service
representative.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
A
Troubleshooting_ 116
Copying problems
Scanning problems
Character Voids
Character voids are white areas within parts of
characters that should be solid black:
• If you are using transparencies, try another
type of transparency. Because of the
composition of transparencies, some
character voids are normal.
• You may be printing on the wrong surface
of the paper. Remove the paper and turn it
around.
• The paper may not meet paper
specifications. (See "Specification on print
media" on page 35.)
Horizontal stripes
If horizontally aligned black streaks or smears
appear:
• The imaging unit may be installed
improperly. Remove the cartridge and
reinsert it.
• The imaging unit may be defective.
Remove the toner cartridge and install a
new one. (See "Replacing the toner
cartridge" on page 96.)
• If the problem persists, the machine may
require repair. Contact a service
representative.
Curl
If the printed paper is curled or paper does not
feed into the machine:
• Turn the stack of paper over in the tray.
Also try rotating the paper 180° in the tray.
• Change the printer option and try again. Go
to printer properties, click Paper tab, and
set type to Thin Paper. Refer to the
Software section for details.
An unknown
image repetitively
appears on a next
few sheets or
loose toner, light
print, or
contamination
occurs.
Your printer is probably being used at an
altitude of 1,000 m (3,281 ft) or above.
The high altitude may affect the print quality
such as loose toner or light imaging. You can
set this option through Paper or Printer tab in
printer driver’s properties. (See "Altitude
adjustment" on page 29.)
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Copies are too light
or too dark. Use Light and Dark arrows to darken or
lighten the backgrounds of copies.
Smears, lines,
marks, or spots
appears on copies.
• If the defects are on the original, press
Light and Dark arrows to lighten the
background of your copies.
• If there are no defects on the original, clean
the scan unit. (See "Cleaning the scan
unit" on page 95.)
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
A
Copy image is
skewed. • Ensure that the original is face down on the
scanner glass or face up in the DADF.
• Check that the copy paper is loaded
correctly.
Blank copies print
out. Ensure that the original is face down on the
scanner glass or face up in the DADF.
Image rubs off the
copy easily. • Replace the paper in the tray with paper
from a new package.
• In high humidity areas, do not leave paper
in the machine for extended periods of
time.
Frequent copy paper
jams occur. • Fan the stack of paper, then turn it over in
the tray. Replace the paper in the tray with
a fresh supply. Check/adjust the paper
guides, if necessary.
• Ensure that the paper is the proper paper
weight. 80 g/m2 bond paper is
recommended.
• Check for copy paper or pieces of copy
paper remaining in the machine after a
paper jam has been cleared.
Toner cartridge
produces fewer
copies than expected
before running out of
toner.
• Your originals may contain pictures, solids,
or heavy lines. For example, your originals
may be forms, newsletters, books, or other
documents that use more toner.
• The machine may be turned on and off
frequently.
• The scanner lid may be left open while
copies are being made.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The scanner does
not work. • Make sure that you place the original to be
scanned face down on the scanner glass, or
face up in the DADF.
• There may not be enough available memory
to hold the document you want to scan. Try
the Prescan function to see if that works. Try
lowering the scan resolution rate.
• Check that the printer cable is connected
properly.
• Make sure that the printer cable is not
defective. Switch the cable with a known
good cable. If necessary, replace the cable.
• Check that the scanner is configured
correctly. Check scan setting in the
SmarThru Configuration
or the application
you want to use to make certain that the
scanner job is being sent to the correct port.
• In case of use of account feature, make sure
that you have extra scan count remained.
For example, if you try to scan 10-page
document while you have 5 scan count left,
the scan job would be canceled.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
117 _Troubleshooting
Samsung Scan Manager Problem
Fax problems
Common PostScript problems
The following situations are PS language specific and may occur when
several printer languages are being used.
The unit scans very
slowly. • Check if the machine is printing received
data. If so, scan the document after the
received data has been printed.
• Graphics are scanned more slowly than text.
• Communication speed slows in scan mode
because of the large amount of memory
required to analyze and reproduce the
scanned image. Set your computer to the
ECP printer mode through BIOS setting. It
will help to increase the speed. For details
about how to set BIOS, refer to your
computer user’s guide.
Message appears on
your computer
screen:
• “Device can't be
set to the H/W
mode you want.”
• “Port is being used
by another
program.”
• “Port is Disabled.”
• “Scanner is busy
receiving or
printing data.
When the current
job is completed,
try again.”
• “Invalid handle.”
• “Scanning has
failed.”
• There may be a copying or printing job in
progress. Try your job again when that job is
finished, try your job again.
• The selected port is currently being used.
Restart your computer and try again.
• The printer cable may be improperly
connected or the power may be off.
• The scanner driver is not installed or the
operating environment is not set up properly.
• Ensure that the machine is properly
connected and the power is on, then restart
your computer.
• The USB cable may be improperly
connected or the power may be off.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Samsung Scan
Manager does not
work.
Check your system requirements. Samsung
Scan Manager works in Window and
Macintosh (See "System requirements" on
page 26.)
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The machine is not
working, there is no
display and the
buttons are not
working.
• Unplug the power cord and plug it in again.
• Ensure that there is power being supplied to
the electrical outlet.
No dial tone sounds. • Check that the phone line is properly
connected.
• Check that the phone socket on the wall is
working by plugging in another phone.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The numbers stored
in memory do not
dial correctly.
Make sure that the numbers are stored in
memory correctly. Print a Fax Phone Book
list. (See "Setting up a fax phonebook" on
page 66.)
The original does not
feed into the
machine.
• Make sure that the paper is not wrinkled and
you are inserting it in correctly. Check that
the original is the right size, not too thick or
thin.
• Make sure that the DADF is firmly closed.
• The DADF rubber pad may need to be
replaced. Contact a service representative.
Faxes are not
received
automatically.
• The receiving mode should be set to Fax.
• Make sure that there is paper in the tray.
• Check to see if the display shows any error
message. If it does, clear the problem.
The machine does
not send. • Make sure that the original is loaded in the
DADF or on the scanner glass.
• Check the fax machine you are sending to,
to see if it can receive your fax.
The incoming fax has
blank spaces or is of
poor-quality.
• The fax machine sending you the fax may
be faulty.
• A noisy phone line can cause line errors.
• Check your machine by making a copy.
• The toner cartridge may be empty. Replace
the toner cartridge. (See "Replacing the
toner cartridge" on page 96.)
Some of the words
on an incoming fax
are stretched.
The fax machine sending the fax had a
temporary document jam.
There are lines on
the originals you
sent.
Check your scan unit for marks and clean it.
(See "Cleaning the scan unit" on page 95.)
The machine dials a
number, but the
connection with the
other fax machine
fails.
The other fax machine may be turned off, out
of paper, or cannot answer incoming calls.
Speak with the other machine operator and
ask her/him to solve out the problem.
Faxes do not store in
memory. There may not be enough memory space to
store the fax. If the display shows the low Fax
memory is full. Print or remove received fax
Job message, delete any faxes you no longer
need from the memory and then try to store the
fax again. Please call for service.
Blank areas appear
at the bottom of each
page or on other
pages, with a small
strip of text at the
top.
You may have chosen the wrong paper
settings in the user option setting. For details
about paper settings. (See "Setting the paper
size and type" on page 40.)
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Troubleshooting_ 118
Common Windows problems
To receive a printed or screen-displayed message when PostScript
errors occur, open the Print Options window and click the desired
selection next to the PostScript errors section.
PROBLEM POSSIBLE
CAUSE SOLUTION
PostScript file
cannot be
printed.
The PostScript
driver may not be
installed correctly.
• Install the PostScript
driver, referring to
Software section.
• Print a configuration page
and verify that the PS
version is available for
printing.
• If the problem persists,
contact a service
representative.
“Limit Check
Error” message
appears.
The print job was
too complex. You might need to reduce the
complexity of the page or
install more memory.
A PostScript
error page prints. The print job may
not be PostScript. Make sure that the print job is
a PostScript job. Check to
see whether the software
application expected a setup
or PostScript header file to be
sent to the machine.
The optional tray
is not selected in
the driver.
The printer driver
has not been
configured to
recognize the
optional tray.
Open the PostScript driver
properties, select the
Device
Settings
tab, and set the
Tray
option of the
Installable
Options
section to
Installed
.
The machine
does not staple
correctly when
printing more
than one copy
from Acrobat
Reader with a
collate option.
(only in Window/
Macintosh)
It might take
longer to print
when you print a
PDF file as an
image.
Try to print with the latest
Adobe Reader program or
print with turning on "Print as
Image" option from Acrobat
printing options. It might take
longer to print when you print
a PDF file as an image.
The machine
does not staple
correctly when
printing more
than one copy
with a collate
option. (only in
Linux)
Turning off
collation options
on applications
(including CUPS
pstops collation
option) may solve
this problem.
If you want to use the
collation option, go to printer
driver’s advanced option and
turn the collation on.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
“File in Use”
message appears
during installation.
Exit all software applications. Remove all
software from the StartUp Group, then restart
Windows. Reinstall the printer driver.
“General Protection
Fault”, “Exception
OE”, “Spool32”, or
“Illegal Operation”
messages appear.
Close all other applications, reboot Windows
and try printing again.
“Fail To Print”, “A
printer timeout error
occurred.” messages
appear.
These messages may appear during printing.
Just keep waiting until the machine finishes
printing. If the message appears in standby
mode or after printing has been completed,
check the connection and/or whether an error
has occurred.
Refer to Microsoft Windows User’s Guide that came with your
computer for further information on Windows error messages.
119 _Troubleshooting
Common Linux problems
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The machine does
not print. • Check if the printer driver is installed in your
system. Open Unified Driver configurator
and switch to the Printers tab in Printers
configuration window to look at the list of
available printers. Make sure that your
machine is displayed on the list. If not, invoke
Add new printer wizard to set up your device.
• Check if the printer is started. Open Printers
configuration and select your machine on the
printers list. Look at the description in the
Selected printer pane. If its status contains
“(stopped)” string, press the Start button.
After that normal operation of the printer
should be restored. The “stopped” status
might be activated when some problems in
printing occurred. For instance, this could be
an attempt to print document when port is
claimed by a scanning application.
• Check if the port is not busy. Since functional
components of MFP (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different
“consumer” application to the same port is
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only
one of them at a time is allowed to gain
control over the device. The other
“consumer” will encounter “device busy”
response. You should open ports
configuration and select the port assigned to
your printer. In the Selected port pane you
can see if the port is occupied by some other
application. If this is the case, you should
wait for completion of the current job or
should press Release port button, if you are
sure that the present owner is not functioning
properly.
• Check if your application has special print
option such as “-oraw”. If “-oraw” is specified
in the command line parameter then remove
it to print properly. For Gimp front-end, select
“print” -> “Setup printer” and edit command
line parameter in the command item.
• The CUPS (Common Unix Printing System)
version distributed with SuSE Linux 9.2
(cups-1.1.21) has a problem with ipp
(Internet Printing Protocol) printing.Use the
socket printing instead of ipp or install later
version of CUPS (cups-1.1.22 or higher).
The machine does
not print whole pages
and its output is half
page printed.
It is a known problem that occurs when a color
printer is used on version 8.51 or earlier of
Ghostscript, 64-bit Linux OS, and reported to
bugs.ghostscript.com as Ghostscript Bug
688252.
The problem is solved in AFPL Ghostscript v.
8.52 or above. Download the latest version of
AFPL Ghostscript from http://sourceforge.net/
projects/ghostscript/ and install it to solve this
problem.
I cannot scan via
Gimp Front-end. • Check if Gimp Front-end has “Xsane: Device
dialog.” on the “Acquire” menu. If not, you
should install Xsane plug-in for Gimp on the
your computer. You can find Xsane plug-in
package for Gimp on Linux distribution CD or
Gimp home page. For the detail information,
refer to the Help for Linux distribution CD or
Gimp Front-end application.
If you wish to use other kind of scan application,
refer to the Help for application.
I encounter error
“Cannot open port
device file” when
printing a document.
Avoid changing print job parameters (via LPR
GUI, for example) while a print job is in
progress. Known versions of CUPS server
break the print job whenever print options are
changed and then try to restart the job from the
beginning. Since Unified Linux Driver locks port
while printing, the abrupt termination of the
driver keeps the port locked and therefore
unavailable for subsequent print jobs. If this
situation occurred, try to release the port.
The machine does
not appear on the
scanners list.
• Check if your machine is attached to your
computer. Make sure th
at it is connected
properly via the USB port and is turned on.
• Check if the scanner driver for your machine
is installed in your system. Open Unified
Driver configurator, switch to Scanners
configuration, then press Drivers. Make sure
that driver with a name corresponding to
your machine's name is listed in the window.
Check if the port is not busy. Since functional
components of MFP (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different
“consumer” application to the same port is
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only
one of them at a time is allowed to gain
control over the device. The other
“consumer” will encounter “device busy”
response. This can usually happen while
starting scan procedure, and appropriate
message box appears.
•
To identify the source of the problem, you
should open ports configuration and select the
port assigned to your scanner. port's symbol /
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /
dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/
mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In
the Selected port pane you can see if the port is
occupied by some other appli
cation. If this is
the case, you should wait for completion of
the current job or should press Release port
button, if you are sure that the present port's
owner is not functioning properly.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
Troubleshooting_ 120
Common Macintosh problems
The machine does
not scan. • Check if a document is loaded
into the
machine.
• Check if your machine is connected to the
computer. Make sure if it is connected properly
if I/O error is reported while scanning.
• Check if the port is not busy. Since functional
components of MFP (printer and scanner)
share the same I/O interface (port), the
situation of simultaneous access of different
“consumer” application to the same port is
possible. To avoid possible conflicts, only one
of them at a time is allowed to gain control over
the device. The other “consumer” will
encounter “device busy” response. This can
usually happen while starting scan procedure,
and appropriate message box will be displayed.
To identify the source of the problem, you
should open ports configuration and select the
port assigned to your scanner. port’s symbol /
dev/mfp0 corresponds to LP:0 designation
displayed in the scanners’ options, /dev/mfp1
relates to LP:1 and so on. USB ports start at /
dev/mfp4, so scanner on USB:0 relates to /dev/
mfp4 respectively and so forth sequentially. In
the Selected port pane you can see if the port is
occupied by some other application. If this is
the case, you should wait for completion of the
current job or should press Release port
button, if you are sure that the present port’s
owner is not functioning properly.
Refer to Linux User’s Guide that came with your computer for further
information on Linux error messages.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The printer does not
print PDF file correctly.
Some parts of graphics,
text, or illustrations are
missing.
Incompatibility between the PDF file and
the Acrobat products:
Printing the PDF file as an image may
solve this problem. Turn on Print As
Image from the Acrobat printing options.
It will take longer to print when
you print a PDF file as an image.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
The document has
printed, but the print job
has not disappeared
from the spooler in Mac
OS 10.3.2.
Update your Mac OS to OS 10.3.3. or
higher.
Some letters are not
displayed normally
during the Cover page
printing.
This problem is caused because Mac OS
cannot create the font during the Cover
page printing. English alphabet and
numbers are displayed normally at the
Cover page.
When printing a
document in Macintosh
with Acrobat Reader 6.0
or higher, colors print
incorrectly.
Make sure that the resolution setting in
your printer driver matches the one in
Acrobat Reader.
Refer to Mac OS User’s Guide that came with your computer for
further information on Mac OS error messages.
CONDITION SUGGESTED SOLUTIONS
121 _Ordering supplies and accessories
ordering supplies and accessories
This chapter provides information on purchasing cartridges and accessories available for your machine.
This chapter includes:
• Supplies
• Accessories • How to purchase
SUPPLIES
When the toner cartridge or imaging unit runs out, you can order the
following type of toner or imaging unit for your machine:
ACCESSORIES
You can purchase and install accessories to enhance your machine’s
performance and capacity.
The optional parts or features may differ by countries. Contact your
sales representatives whether the part you want is available in your
country.
TYPE AVERAGE YIELDA
a.Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.
PART NUMBER
Toner cartridgeaApprox. 25,000 SCX-D6555A
Imaging unitb
b.Declared yield value is based on a single side of A4- or letter-sized
paper.
Approx. 80,000 SCX-R6555A
Depending on the options and job mode, the imaging unit’s lifespan
may differ.
When purchasing new print cartridges or other supplies, these must
be purchased in the same country where the machine was
purchased. Otherwise, print cartridges or other supplies will be
incompatible with your machine, as configurations of print cartridges
and other supplies vary, depending on the specific country.
ACCESSORY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER
Memory module Extends your
machine’s memory
capacity.
ML-MEM160: 256 MB
This machine
comes with
256 MB DIMM.
To expand the
memory of your
machine, you
must remove the
existing DIMM
and purchase a
larger one.
Optional tray 2/3/4 If you are experiencing
paper supply problems
frequently, you can
attach an additional 520
sheet tray. You can
print documents in
various sizes and types
of print materials.
SCX-S6555A
High capacity
feeder If you are frequently
experiencing paper
supply problems, you
can attach an additional
2,100 sheet tray.
SCX-HCF100
Fax option kit This kit lets you use
your machine as a fax
machine.
SCX-FAX210a
After installing
the kit, you have
to set up your
machine to
activate this
machine. (See
Page 125)
Stand You can place the
machine on the
ergonomically-
designed cabinet which
lets you reach the
machine conveniently.
Also, you can easily
move the cabinet with
its wheels, if necessary,
and store
miscellaneous items
like papers into the
cabinet.
• Tall Stand: SCX-
DSK10T
• Short Stand: SCX-
DSK10S
If you do not use
the optional tray
then Tall Stand is
recommended. In
case you add
three optional
trays, use Short
Stand.
Stacker & Stapler
(Finisher) 500 sheets SCX-FIN10S
Staple Cartridge 3 x 5,000 staples per
package, covers
maximum thickness of
50 sheets, 1 staple
position.
SCX-STP000
SmarThru
WorkFlow This feature lets you
send additional
information along with
the scanned document
to a specified network
location.
SCX-KIT11S
ACCESSORY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER
Ordering supplies and accessories_ 122
HOW TO PURCHASE
To order Samsung-authorized supplies or accessories, contact your local
Samsung dealer or the retailer where you purchased your machine, or visit
www.samsungprinter.com and select your country/region to obtain
information on calling for technical support.
FDI (Foreign
Device Interface)
kit
This card is installed
inside the machine to
allow a third party
device such as a coin
operated device or a
card reader. Those
devices allow the pay-
for-print service on your
machine.
SCX-KIT20F
a.Countries which supports the serial telephone system are Germany,
Italia, France, Sweden, Denmark, Finland, Austria, Switzerland,
Belgium, Hungary.
ACCESSORY DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER
123 _Installing accessories
installing accessories
Your machine is a full-featured model that has been optimized to meet most of your printing needs. Recognizing that each user
may have different requirements, however, Samsung makes several accessories available to enhance your machine’s capabilities.
This chapter includes
• Precautions to take when installing accessories
• Installing a memory DIMM • Replacing the Stapler
• Enabling Fax feature after installing the fax option kit
PRECAUTIONS TO TAKE WHEN INSTALLING
ACCESSORIES
• Disconnect the power cord
Never remove the control board cover while the power is turned on.
To avoid the possibility of an electrical shock, always disconnect the
power cord when installing or removing ANY internal or external
accessories.
• Discharge static electricity
The control board and internal accessories (network interface card or
memory module) are sensitive to static electricity. Before installing or
removing any internal accessories, discharge static electricity from your
body by touching something metal, such as the metal back plate on any
device plugged into a grounded power source. If you walk around before
finishing the installation, repeat this procedure to discharge any static
electricity again.
INSTALLING A MEMORY DIMM
Your machine has a dual in-line memory module (DIMM) slot. Use this
DIMM slot to install additional memory.
Your machine has 256 MB of memory which can be expanded to 512 MB.
The order information is provided for optional memory DIMM. (See "Memory
module" on page 121.)
Installing a memory module
1. Turn the machine off and unplug all cables from the machine.
2. Open the control board cover by grasping it and slide toward you.
3. Take out a new memory DIMM from the plastic bag.
4. Holding the memory module by the edges, align the memory module on
the slot at about a 30-degree tilt. Make sure that the notches of the
module and the grooves on the slot fit each other.
5. Press the memory module into the slot with care until you hear a “click”.
1control board
cover
The notches and grooves illustrated above may not match those
on an actual DIMM and its slot.
Do not press the memory module strongly or the module may be
damaged. If the module does not seem to fit into the slot properly,
carefully try the previous procedure again.
Installing accessories_ 124
6. Replace the control board cover.
7. Reconnect the power cord and printer cable, and turn the machine on.
Activating the added memory in the PS printer
properties
After installing the memory module, you need to select it in the printer
properties of the PostScript printer driver in order to use it.
1. Make sure that the PostScript printer driver is installed on your
computer. For details about installing the PS printer driver, see Software
section.
2. Click the Windows Start menu.
3. For Windows 2000, select Settings and then Printers.
For Windows XP/2003, select Printers and Faxes.
For Windows Vista/2008, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound
> Printers.
For Windows 7, select Control Panel > Hardware and Sound >
Devices and Printers.
For Windows Server 2008 R2, select Control Panel > Hardware >
Devices and Printers.
4. Select the Samsung SCX-6545 Series PS printer.
5. Click the right mouse button on the printer icon and select Properties.
6. Select Device Settings.
7. Select the amount of memory you installed from
Printer Memory
in the
Installable Options
section.
8. Click OK.
REPLACING THE STAPLER
When the stapler is completely empty, the message for installing the staple
cartridge appears on the display screen.
1. Open the finisher cover.
2. Pull the stapler unit out.
3. Lift the empty staple cartridge from the stapler unit.
4. Unpack the new staple cartridge.
5. Place the staple cartridge back into the stapler unit.
6. Slide the stapler unit in until it locks in place.
125 _Installing accessories
7. Close the finisher cover.
ENABLING FAX FEATURE AFTER INSTALLING
THE FAX OPTION KIT
After installing the Fax kit, you have to set up the machine in order to use
this function.
1. Press Machine Setup on the control panel.
2. Press Admin Setting.
3. When the login message appears, enter password with number keypad
and press OK. (See "Setting the authentication password" on page 29.)
4. Press the General tab.
5. Press Country.
Change the country, then some the values for fax and paper size will be
changed automatically for your country.
Specifications_ 126
specifications
This chapter guides you about this machine’s specifications such as various features.
This chapter includes;
• General specifications
• Printer specifications
• Copier specifications
• Scanner specifications
• Facsimile specifications (optional)
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
PRINTER SPECIFICATIONS
Item Description
DADF Up to 100 sheets 75 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
DADF document
size • Width: 145 to 216 mm
• Length: 145 to 356 mm
Paper input
capacity • Tray 1: 500 multi-page for plain paper (80 g/m2)
• Multi-purpose tray: 100 multi-page for plain paper
(80 g/m2)
• optional tray 2/3/4: 520 multi-page for plain paper
(80 g/m2)
• optional high capacity feeder: 2,100 multi-page
for plain paper (80 g/m2)
For details about paper input capacity, see
"Specification on print media" on page 35.
Paper output
capacity • Face down: 500 sheets 80 g/m2 (20 lb bond)
• Optional stacker: 500 sheets 80 g/m2 (20 lb
bond)
Consumables 2-piece toner cartridge and imaging unit system
Power rating 110 - 127 VAC, or 220 - 240 VAC
See the Rating label on the machine for the correct
voltage, frequency (hertz) and type of current for
your machine.
Power
consumption • Average operation mode: Less than 750 W
• Power save mode: Less than 30 W
• Stand by mode: Less than 120 W
Noise levela• Standby mode: Less than 37 dBA
• Printing mode: Less than 55 dBA
• Copying mode: Less than 57 dBA
Boot-up time Less than 25 seconds (from sleep mode)
The boot-up time will be longer, if data volume is a
lot in the HDD
Operating
environment Temperature: 10 °C to 32 °C
Humidity: 20% to 80% RH
Display wVGA (800 x 480 x RGB) color
Toner cartridge
yieldbAverage Cartridge Yield 25,000 standard pages.
Declared yield value in accordance with ISO/IEC
19752.
Imaging unit
yieldcApprox. 80,000 pages
Memory 256 MB (max. 512 MB)
External
dimension
(W x D x H)
641 x 494 x 607 mm (25.2 x 19.4 x 23.9 inches)
without optional trays
Weight 48.2 Kg (including consumables)
Package weight Paper: 5.4 Kg, Plastic: 1.2 Kg
Duty cycle Monthly print volume: Up to 200,000 pages
a.Sound Pressure Level, ISO 7779
b.Average cartridge yield declared in accordance with ISO/IEC 19752.
The number of pages may be affected by the operating environment,
printing interval, media type, and media size.
c. May be affected by operating environment, optional, printing interval,
media type and media size.
Item Description
Printing method Laser Beam Printing
Printing speedaUp to 43 ppm in A4 (45 ppm in Letter)
Duplex printing
speed Up to 38 ppm in A4 (40 ppm in Letter)
First print out
time 8 seconds (from ready)
Print resolution Up to 1,200 x 1,200 dpi Effective output
Printer language PCL 6, PS 3, PDF Direct V1.4, TIFF, JPEG
OS compatibilityb• PCL Driver: 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista/7/Server
2008 R2
• PS Driver: 2000/XP/2003/2008/Vista/7/Server
2008 R2, Various Linux OS,
Mac OS 10.3 ~ 10.6
Interface High Speed USB 2.0
High Speed USB 2.0 HOST
Ethernet 10/100/1000 Base TX
Item Description
127 _Specifications
COPIER SPECIFICATIONS
SCANNER SPECIFICATIONS
FACSIMILE SPECIFICATIONS (OPTIONAL)
a.Print speed will be affected by operating system used, computing
performance, application software, connect on method, media type,
media size, and job complexity.
b.Please visit www.samsungprinter.com to download the latest software
version.
Item Description
Copy speeda
a.Copy speed is based on single document multiple copy.
Up to 43 cpm in A4 (45 cpm in Letter)
Duplex copy
speed • Simplex to Duplex (1-2): Up to 38 cpm in A4
(40 cpm in Letter)
• Duplex to Duplex (2-2): Up to 28 cpm in A4
(30 cpm in Letter)
First copy out
time • Scanner glass: Less than 5 seconds
• DADF: Less than 8 seconds
Copy resolution • Scan:up to 600 x 300 (text, text/photo),
up to 600 x 600 (photo)
• Print:up to 600 x 600 (text, text/photo),
up to 600 x 600 (photo)
Zoom rate • Scanner glass: 25 to 400%
• DADF: 25 to 200%
Multiple copies 1 to 999 pages
Item Description
Compatibility TWAIN standard / WIA standard
Scanning method DADF and Flat-bed Color CCD (Charge Coupled
Device) module
Resolutiona TWAIN standard: 1,200 x 1,200 dpi (Up to 4,800 x
4,800 dpi by software enhancement)
WIA standard: Up to 600 x 600 dpi
Scan to USB, Scan to PC: 100, 200, 300 dpi
Scan to E-mail, Scan to Server: 100, 200, 300, 400,
600 dpi
Network Scan File
format PDF, TIFF, JPEGb
Effective
scanning length • Scanner glass: 348 mm (13.7 inches)
• DADF: 348 mm (13.7 inches)
Effective
scanning width Max. 208 mm (8.2 inches)
Color bit depth • Internal: 36 bits
• External: 24 bits
Mono bit depth 1 bit for Linearity & Halftone
8 bits (External), 12 bits (Internal) for Gray scale
Grayscale 256 levels
a.Due to the applications for scanning, the maximum resolution might
differ.
b.JPEG is not available when you select the mono mode in Color Mode.
Item Description
Compatibility ITU-T G3, Super G3
Applicable line Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) or
behind PABX
Data coding MH/MR/MMR/JBIG/JPEG (Tx only)
Modem speed 33.6 Kbps
Transmission
speed Up to 3 seconds/pagea
a.Standard resolution, MMR(JBIG), Maximum modem speed, Phase"C"
by ITU-T No.1 chart, Memory Tx, ECM.
Maximum
document length • Scanner glass: 356 mm (14 inches)
• Duplex automatic document glass: 356 mm
(14 inches)
Resolution • Standard: 203 x 98 dpi (mono), 200 x 200 dpi
(color)
• Fine: 203 x 196 dpi (mono), 200 x 200 dpi (color)
• Super Fine: 300 x 300 dpi (mono), 200 x 200 dpi
(color)
Memory Max 2 GB (uses HDD)
Halftone 256 levels
Auto dialer up to 200 numbers
Item Description
Glossary_ 128
glossary
ADF
An Automatic Document Feeder (ADF) is a mechanism that will
automatically feed an original sheet of paper so that the machine can
scan some amount of the paper at once.
AppleTalk
AppleTalk is a proprietary suite of protocols developed by Apple, Inc for
computer networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984)
and is now deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
BIT Depth
A computer graphics term describing the number of bits used to
represent the color of a single pixel in a bitmapped image. Higher color
depth gives a broader range of distinct colors. As the number of bits
increases, the number of possible colors becomes impractically large for
a color map. 1-bit color is commonly called as monochrome or black and
white.
BMP
A bitmapped graphics format used internally by the Microsoft Windows
graphics subsystem (GDI), and used commonly as a simple graphics file
format on that platform.
BOOTP
Bootstrap Protocol. A network protocol used by a network client to
obtain its IP address automatically. This is usually done in the bootstrap
process of computers or operating systems running on them. The
BOOTP servers assign the IP address from a pool of addresses to each
client. BOOTP enables 'diskless workstation' computers to obtain an IP
address prior to loading any advanced operating system.
CCD
Charge Coupled Device (CCD) is a hardware which enables the scan
job. CCD Locking mechanism is also used to hold the CCD module to
prevent any damage when you move the machine.
Collation
Collation is a process of printing a multiple-copy job in sets. When
collation is selected, the device prints an entire set before printing
additional copies.
Control Panel
A control panel is a flat, typically vertical, area where control or
monitoring instruments are displayed. They are typically found in front of
the machine.
Coverage
It is the printing term used for a toner usage measurement on printing.
For example, 5% coverage means that an A4 sided paper has about 5%
image or text on it. So, if the paper or original has complicated images or
lots of text on it, the coverage will be higher and at the same time, a
toner usage will be as much as the coverage.
CSV
Comma Separated Values (CSV). A type of file format, CSV is used to
exchange data between disparate applications. The file format, as it is
used in Microsoft Excel, has become a pseudo standard throughout the
industry, even among non-Microsoft platforms.
DADF
A Duplex Automatic Document Feeder (DADF) is a mechanism that will
automatically feed and flip over an original sheet of paper so that the
machine can scan on both sides of the paper.
Default
The value or setting that is in effect when taking a printer out of its box
state, reset, or initialized.
DHCP
A Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is a client-server
networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration parameters
specific to the DHCP client host requesting, generally, information
required by the client host to participate on an IP network. DHCP also
provides a mechanism for allocation of IP addresses to client hosts.
DIMM
Dual Inline Memory Module (DIMM), a small circuit board that holds
memory. DIMM stores all the data within the machine like printing data,
received fax data.
DNS
The Domain Name Server (DNS) is a system that stores information
associated with domain names in a distributed database on networks,
such as the Internet.
Dot Matrix Printer
A dot matrix printer refers to a type of computer printer with a print head
that runs back and forth on the page and prints by impact, striking an
ink-soaked cloth ribbon against the paper, much like a typewriter.
DPI
Dots Per Inch (DPI) is a measurement of resolution that is used for
scanning and printing. Generally, higher DPI results in a higher
resolution, more visible detail in the image, and a larger file size.
DRPD
Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection. Distinctive Ring is a telephone
company service which enables a user to use a single telephone line to
answer several different telephone numbers.
Duplex
A mechanism that will automatically flip over a sheet of paper so that the
machine can print (or scan) on both sides of the paper. A printer
equipped with a Duplex can print double-sided of paper.
Duty Cycle
Duty cycle is the page quantity which does not affect printer
performance for a month. Generally the printer has the lifespan limitation
such as pages per year. The lifespan means the average capacity of
print-outs, usually within the warranty period. For example, if the duty
cycle is 48,000 pages per month assuming 20 working days, a printer
limits 2,400 pages a day.
ECM
Error Correction Mode (ECM) is an optional transmission mode built into
Class 1 fax machines or fax modems. It automatically detects and
corrects errors in the fax transmission process that are sometimes
caused by telephone line noise.
Emulation
Emulation is a technique of one machine obtaining the same results as
another.
The following glossary helps you get familiar with the product by
understanding the terminologies commonly used with printing as well
as mentioned in this user's guide.
129 _Glossary
An emulator duplicates the functions of one system with a different
system, so that the second system behaves like the first system.
Emulation focuses on exact reproduction of external behavior, which is
in contrast to simulation, which concerns an abstract model of the
system being simulated, often considering its internal state.
Ethernet
Ethernet is a frame-based computer networking technology for local
area networks (LANs). It defines wiring and signaling for the physical
layer, and frame formats and protocols for the media access control
(MAC)/data link layer of the OSI model. Ethernet is mostly standardized
as IEEE 802.3. It has become the most widespread LAN technology in
use during the 1990s to the present.
EtherTalk
A suite of protocols developed by Apple Computer for computer
networking. It was included in the original Macintosh (1984) and is now
deprecated by Apple in favor of TCP/IP networking.
FDI
Foreign Device Interface (FDI) is a card installed inside the machine to
allow a third party device such as a coin operated device or a card
reader. Those devices allow the pay-for-print service on your machine.
FTP
A File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is a commonly used protocol for
exchanging files over any network that supports the TCP/IP protocol
(such as the Internet or an intranet).
Fuser Unit
The part of a laser printer that melts the toner onto the print media. It
consists of a hot roller and a back-up roller. After toner is transferred
onto the paper, the fuser unit applies heat and pressure to ensure that
the toner stays on the paper permanently, which is why paper is warm
when it comes out of a laser printer.
Gateway
A connection between computer networks, or between a computer
network and a telephone line. It is very popular, as it is a computer or a
network that allows access to another computer or network.
Grayscale
A shades of gray that represent light and dark portions of an image
when color images are converted to grayscale; colors are represented
by various shades of gray.
Halftone
An image type that simulates grayscale by varying the number of dots.
Highly colored areas consist of a large number of dots, while lighter
areas consist of a smaller number of dots.
HDD
Hard Disk Drive (HDD), commonly referred to as a hard drive or hard
disk, is a non-volatile storage device which stores digitally-encoded data
on rapidly rotating platters with magnetic surfaces.
IEEE
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) is an
international non-profit, professional organization for the advancement
of technology related to electricity.
IEEE 1284
The 1284 parallel port standard was developed by the Institute of
Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). The term "1284-B" refers to
a specific connector type on the end of the parallel cable that attaches to
the peripheral (for example, a printer).
Intranet
A private network that uses Internet Protocols, network connectivity, and
possibly the public telecommunication system to securely share part of
an organization's information or operations with its employees.
Sometimes the term refers only to the most visible service, the internal
website.
IP address
An Internet Protocol (IP) address is a unique number that devices use in
order to identify and communicate with each other on a network utilizing
the Internet Protocol standard.
IPM
The Images Per Minute (IPM) is a way of measuring the speed of a
printer. An IPM rate indicates the number of single-sided sheets a printer
can complete within one minute.
IPP
The Internet Printing Protocol (IPP) defines a standard protocol for
printing as well as managing print jobs, media size, resolution, and so
forth. IPP can be used locally or over the Internet to hundreds of
printers, and also supports access control, authentication, and
encryption, making it a much more capable and secure printing solution
than older ones.
IPX/SPX
IPX/SPX stands for Internet Packet Exchange/Sequenced Packet
Exchange. It is a networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare
operating systems. IPX and SPX both provide connection services
similar to TCP/IP, with the IPX protocol having similarities to IP, and
SPX having similarities to TCP. IPX/SPX was primarily designed for
local area networks (LANs), and is a very efficient protocol for this
purpose (typically its performance exceeds that of TCP/IP on a LAN).
ISO
The International Organization for Standardization (ISO) is an
international standard-setting body composed of representatives from
national standards bodies. It produces world-wide industrial and
commercial standards.
ITU-T
The International Telecommunication Union is an international
organization established to standardize and regulate international radio
and telecommunications. Its main tasks include standardization,
allocation of the radio spectrum, and organizing interconnection
arrangements between different countries to allow international phone
calls. A -T out of ITU-T indicates telecommunication.
ITU-T No. 1 chart
Standardized test chart published by ITU-T for document facsimile
transmissions.
JBIG
Joint Bi-level Image Experts Group (JBIG) is an image compression
standard with no loss of accuracy or quality, which was designed for
compression of binary images, particularly for faxes, but can also be
used on other images.
JPEG
Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) is a most commonly used
standard method of lossy compression for photographic images. It is the
format used for storing and transmitting photographs on the World Wide
Web.
LDAP
The Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP) is a networking
protocol for querying and modifying directory services running over TCP/
IP.
Glossary_ 130
LED
LED
A Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is a semiconductor device that indicates
the status of a machine.
MAC address
Media Access Control (MAC) address is a unique identifier associated
with a network adapter. MAC address is a unique 48-bit identifier usually
written as 12 hexadecimal characters grouped in pairs (e. g., 00-00-0c-
34-11-4e). This address is usually hard-coded into a Network Interface
Card (NIC) by its manufacturer, and used as an aid for routers trying to
locate machines on large networks.
MFP
Multi Function Peripheral (MFP) is an office machine that includes the
following functionality in one physical body, so as to have a printer, a
copier, a fax, a scanner and etc.
MH
Modified Huffman (MH) is a compression method for decreasing the
amount of data that needs to be transmitted between the fax machines
to transfer the image recommended by ITU-T T.4. MH is a codebook-
based run-length encoding scheme optimized to efficiently compress
white space. As most faxes consist mostly of white space, this
minimizes the transmission time of most faxes.
MMR
Modified Modified READ (MMR) is a compression method
recommended by ITU-T T.6.
Modem
A device that modulates a carrier signal to encode digital information,
and also demodulates such a carrier signal to decode transmitted
information.
MR
Modified Read (MR) is a compression method recommended by ITU-T
T.4. MR encodes the first scanned line using MH. The next line is
compared to the first, the differences determined, and then the
differences are encoded and transmitted.
NetWare
A network operating system developed by Novell, Inc. It initially used
cooperative multitasking to run various services on a PC, and the
network protocols were based on the archetypal Xerox XNS stack.
Today NetWare supports TCP/IP as well as IPX/SPX.
OPC
Organic Photo Conductor (OPC) is a mechanism that makes a virtual
image for print using a laser beam emitted from a laser printer, and it is
usually green or gray colored and a cylinder shaped.
An exposing unit of a imaging is slowly worn away by its usage of the
printer, and it should be replaced appropriately since it gets scratches
from grits of a paper.
Originals
The first example of something, such as a document, photograph or text,
etc, which is copied, reproduced or translated to produce others, but
which is not itself copied or derived from something else.
OSI
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) is a model developed by the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO) for communications.
OSI offers a standard, modular approach to network design that divides
the required set of complex functions into manageable, self-contained,
functional layers. The layers are, from top to bottom, Application,
Presentation, Session, Transport, Network, Data Link and Physical.
PABX
A private automatic branch exchange (PABX) is an automatic telephone
switching system within a private enterprise.
PCL
Printer Command Language (PCL) is a Page Description Language
(PDL) developed by HP as a printer protocol and has become an
industry standard. Originally developed for early inkjet printers, PCL has
been released in varying levels for thermal, matrix printer, and page
printers.
PDF
Portable Document Format (PDF) is a proprietary file format developed
by Adobe Systems for representing two dimensional documents in a
device independent and resolution independent format.
PostScript
PostScript (PS) is a page description language and programming
language used primarily in the electronic and desktop publishing areas. -
that is run in an interpreter to generate an image.
Printer Driver
A program used to send commands and transfer data from the computer
to the printer.
Print Media
The media like paper, envelopes, labels, and transparencies which can
be used on a printer, a scanner, a fax or, a copier.
PPM
Pages Per Minute (PPM) is a method of measurement for determining
how fast a printer works, meaning the number of pages a printer can
produce in one minute.
PRN file
An interface for a device driver, this allows software to interact with the
device driver using standard input/output system calls, which simplifies
many tasks.
Protocol
A convention or standard that controls or enables the connection,
communication, and data transfer between two computing endpoints.
PS
See PostScript.
PSTN
The Public-Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) is the network of the
world's public circuit-switched telephone networks which, on industrial
premises, is usually routed through the switchboard.
Resolution
The sharpness of an image, measured in Dots Per Inch (DPI). The
higher the dpi, the greater the resolution.
SMB
Server Message Block (SMB) is a network protocol mainly applied to
share files, printers, serial ports, and miscellaneous communications
between nodes on a network. It also provides an authenticated Inter-
process communication mechanism.
SMTP
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) is the standard for e-mail
transmissions across the Internet. SMTP is a relatively simple, text-
based protocol, where one or more recipients of a message are
specified, and then the message text is transferred. It is a client-server
protocol, where the client transmits an email message to the server.
131 _Glossary
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used in conjunction with the network address to
determine which part of the address is the network address and which
part is the host address.
TCP/IP
The Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP);
the set of communications protocols that implement the protocol stack
on which the Internet and most commercial networks run.
TCR
Transmission Confirmation Report (TCR) provides details of each
transmission such as job status, transmission result and number of
pages sent. This report can be set to print after each job or only after
failed transmissions.
TIFF
Tagged Image File Format (TIFF) is a variable-resolution bitmapped
image format. TIFF describes image data that typically come from
scanners. TIFF images make use of tags, keywords defining the
characteristics of the image that is included in the file. This flexible and
platform-independent format can be used for pictures that have been
made by various image processing applications.
Toner Cartridge
A kind of bottle within a machine like printer which contains toner. Toner
is a powder used in laser printers and photocopiers, which forms the text
and images on the printed paper. Toner can be melted by the heat of the
fuser, causing it to bind to the fibers in the paper.
TWAIN
An industry standard for scanners and software. By using a TWAIN-
compliant scanner with a TWAIN-compliant program, a scan can be
initiated from within the program.; an image capture API for Microsoft
Windows and Apple Macintosh operating systems.
UNC Path
Uniform Naming Convention (UNC) is a standard way to access network
shares in Window NT and other Microsoft products. The format of a
UNC path is: \\<servername>\<sharename>\<Additional directory>
URL
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) is the global address of documents
and resources on the Internet. The first part of the address indicates
what protocol to use, the second part specifies the IP address or the
domain name where the resource is located.
USB
Universal Serial Bus (USB) is a standard that was developed by the
USB Implementers Forum, Inc., to connect computers and peripherals.
Unlike the parallel port, USB is designed to concurrently connect a
single computer USB port to multiple peripherals.
Watermark
A watermark is a recognizable image or pattern in paper that appears
lighter when viewed by transmitted light. Watermarks were first
introduced in Bologna, Italy in 1282; they have been used by
papermakers to identify their product, and also on postage stamps,
currency, and other government documents to discourage
counterfeiting.
WIA
Windows Imaging Architecture (WIA) is an imaging architecture that is
originally introduced in Windows Me and Windows XP. A scan can be
initiated from within these operating systems by using a WIA-compliant
scanner.
132
index
A
ADF, load 33
adjustment
altitude 29
admin setting 83
altitude adjustment 85
answering machine/fax 64
authentication
network accounting 89
printing a report 84, 93
setting up 29, 84
auto center 48
B
Book copy 47
C
checking stored document 94
cleaning
inside 95
outside 95
scan unit 95
transfer unit 95
Clone copy 46
collated 44
color mode
faxing 66
scanning 58, 74
control panel 18, 19
copy copying 42
covers 47
duplex copy 43
erasing background 48
erasing edge 48
making a booklet 47
poster 46
reduce/enlarge 43
shifting margin 48
solving copy problems 116
text/photo 44
the size of the originals 42
time & date 86
transparencies 47
copy setup 86
D
DADFcover 18
input tray 18
output tray 18
width guides 18
darkness
copying 44
faxing 65
scanning 58, 75
date & time 29, 84
printing date&time in copied out 84, 86
default settings 30
altitude adjustment 85
changing the default settings 30
energy saver 84
language 84
loading paper 30
machine test 85
measurements 84
output option 85
setting a fax header 62
sound 85
supplies management 85
system timeout 84
tray management 85
tray setting 30
driver installation 27
duplexcopying 43
faxing 65
scanning 57, 74
E
email address
entering email addresses to input field
54
Global 54
Group 54
Individual 54
storing 54
energy saver 29
erasing background
copying 48
faxing 65
scanning 58, 75
erasing punch hole 48
error correction mode 86
error message 108
extension telephone 65
F
fax option kit
enabling option feature after installing
the kit 125
ordering 121
fax receiving
changing the receive mode 64
extension telephone 65
in answering machine/fax 64
in memory 65
secure receiving 65
fax sending
automatic resending 63
delay sending 63
duplex sending 62
redialing the last number 63
sending a fax 62
sending a fax manually 63
sending a priority fax 64
setting a fax header 62
fax setup 86
faxing color mode 66
darkness 65
enabling the fax kit option 92, 125
erasing background 65
original type 65
phonebook 66
printing a fax report 94
resolution 65
solving faxing problems 117
FDI (Foreign Interface Device)
ordering 122
finisher (Stacker & Stapler)
ordering 121
paper jam 107
front cover 18
FTP 56
G
general settings 84
Gray scan 58, 74
GroupGroup fax number 66
133
I
ID copy 45
imaging unit 18
imaging unit reorder notification 94
Individual
email addresses for scanning 54
individual fax number 66
J
jam clearing paper from the duplex unit area
107
clearing paper from the exit area 106
clearing paper from the fuser unit 106
clearing paper from the multi-purpose
tray 106
clearing paper from the optional tray
103, 104
clearing paper from the stacker
(finisher) 107
clearing paper from the toner cartridge
106
clearing paper from the tray1 102
clearing the original from scanner glass
101
tips for avoiding paper jams 100
jam, clear
document 100
JPEG 59, 75
K
keyboard 31
L
language 29
LED Interrupt 21
Power Saver 20
Status 21
Linux problems 119
loading originals
ADF 33
scanner glass 33
M
Machine Info 83
Machine Setup 83
machine status 83
Mailbox
creating Mailbox 68
deleting the data of the Mailbox 69
Mailbox List 68
Mailbox No. 68
Mailbox Passcode 68
polling 68
printing a Mailbox 69
sending to remote Mailbox 69
storing the originals 68
Maintenance
imaging unit 97
maintenance parts 99
toner cartridge 95, 97
memory DIMM
installing 123
memory module
installing 123
ordering 121
message on the display screen 108
Mono 58, 75
multi-purpose tray 18
N
network
setting up 25, 87
notification
receiving a fax in Mailbox 68
N-up copy 46
O
OCR 59, 75
On Hook Dial
sending a fax 63
optional service 91, 92
optional tray 18, 121
original size
copying 42
scanning 57, 74
original type
copying 44
faxing 65
scanning 58, 74
originals
jam, clear 100
loading 33
output options 85
P
paper changing the size 37
clearing jam 102
loading in the multi-purpose tray 39
loading in the optional tray 38
loading in the tray1 38
paper feeding problems 111
paper type
setting 40
phonebook
fax 66
fax phonebook from SyncThru Web
Service 67
pollingdeleting the polling document 67
polling a remote fax 67
polling from remote Mailbox 68
printing the polling document 67
storing the originals for polling 67
PostScript
problems 117
Power Save 29
Power Saver 20
hardware 20
using power save mode 29, 84
print quality problems, solve 114
print/report
accounting reports 93
configuration report 93
e-mail confirmation report 93
fax report 93
network auth. log report 93
network configuration 93
PCL font list 93
PS3 font list 93
scan report 94
scan to server confirmation 93
Schedule jobs report 93
supplies information 93
usage page report 93
printing
problem solving 112
USB memory 76
problem, solve
Linux 119
printing quality 114
134
problems
copying 116
display message 108
faxing 117
paper feeder 111
PostScript 117
printing 112
scanning 116
touch screen 111
Windows 118
Q
qualityscanning 58, 75
R
remote code 86
replacing components
imaging unit 97
toner cartridge 96
replacing stapler 124
Report 93
Resolution
faxing 65
scanning 57
S
scan preset 59
Scan to Email 52
confirmation 93
Scan to Server 56
confirmation 93
scanned file format 59, 75
scanner glass
loading documents 33
scanner lid 18
Scanner lock switch 18
scanning
color mode 58, 74
darkness 58, 75
enabling the scan kit option 92
erasing background 58, 75
file format 59, 75
original size 57, 74
original type 58, 74
printing an email report 94
quality 58, 75
resolution 57, 74
scan preset 59
sending it via email 52
sending it via FTP 56
sending it via SMB 56
solving scanning problems 116
USB flash memory 73, 78
serial number 94
service center registration 84
service contact numbers 135
SetIP linux 31
macintosh 31
windows 30
shifting margin 48
side cover 18
SMB 56
sound 85
speed dial no. 66
Stacker 121
stand 18, 121
staple cartridge
ordering 121
replacing 124
stored documents 94
supplies
browsing the supplies life 83
checking the supplies life 94
expected imaging unit life 85, 97
expected toner cartridge life 85
management 85
Supplies Management 85
SyncThru Web Service
email address 52
fax settings 67
SMB/FTP setting 56
System timeout 29
T
telephone 64
terminal ID 86
TIFF 59, 75
toner cartridge 18
toner reorder notification 94
touch screen
problem solving 111
tray adjusting the width and length 37
optional tray 18
tray1 18
U
USB flash memory
printing 76
scanning 73, 78
using SetIP 30
W
Windows
problems 118
135 _Contact SAMSUNG worldwide
contact samsung worldwide
If you have any comments or questions regarding Samsung products, contact the Samsung customer care center.
COUNTRY/REG
ION CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER WEB SITE
ARGENTINE 0800-333-3733 www.samsung.com/ar
AUSTRALIA 1300 362 603 www.samsung.com/au
AUSTRIA 0810-SAMSUNG (7267864,
€ 0.07/min) www.samsung.com/at
BELARUS 810-800-500-55-500 www.samsung/ua
www.
samsung
.com/ua_ru
BELGIUM 02 201 2418 www.samsung.com/be
(Dutch)
www.samsung.com/be_fr
(French)
BRAZIL 0800-124-421
4004-0000 www.samsung.com/br
CANADA 1-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864) www.samsung.com/ca
CHILE 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/cl
CHINA 400-810-5858
010-6475 1880 www.samsung.com/cn
COLOMBIA 01-8000112112 www.samsung.com.co
COSTA RICA 0-800-507-7267 www.samsung.com/latin
CZECH
REPUBLIC 800-SAMSUNG
(800-726786) www.samsung.com/cz
Samsung Zrt., česká organizační složka, Oasis Florenc,
Sokolovská394/17, 180 00, Praha 8
DENMARK 8-SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/dk
ECUADOR 1-800-10-7267 www.samsung.com/latin
EL SALVADOR 800-6225 www.samsung.com/latin
ESTONIA 800-7267 www.samsung.com/ee
KAZAKHSTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru
KYRGYZSTAN 00-800-500-55-500
FINLAND 30-6227 515 www.samsung.com/fi
FRANCE 01 4863 0000 www.samsung.com/fr
GERMANY 01805 - SAMSUNG
(726-7864 € 0,14/min) www.samsung.de
GUATEMALA 1-800-299-0013 www.samsung.com/latin
HONDURAS 800-7919267 www.samsung.com/latin
HONG KONG 3698-4698 www.samsung.com/hk
www.samsung.com/hk_en/
HUNGARY 06-80-SAMSUNG
(726-7864) www.samsung.com/hu
INDIA 3030 8282
1800 110011
1800 3000 8282
www.samsung.com/in
INDONESIA 0800-112-8888 www.samsung.com/id
ITALIA 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864) www.samsung.com/it
JAMAICA 1-800-234-7267 www.samsung.com/latin
JAPAN 0120-327-527 www.samsung.com/jp
LATVIA 8000-7267 www.samsung.com/lv
LITHUANIA 8-800-77777 www.samsung.com/lt
LUXEMBURG 02 261 03 710 www.samsung.com/lu
MALAYSIA 1800-88-9999 www.samsung.com/my
MEXICO 01-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864) www.samsung.com/mx
MOLDOVA 00-800-500-55-500 www.samsung/ua
www.
samsung
.com/ua_ru
NETHERLANDS 0900-SAMSUNG
(0900-7267864) (€
0,10/min)
www.samsung.com/nl
NEW ZEALAND 0800 SAMSUNG (0800 726
786) www.samsung.com/nz
NICARAGUA 00-1800-5077267 www.samsung.com/latin
NORWAY 3-SAMSUNG (7267864) www.samsung.com/no
PANAMA 800-7267 www.samsung.com/latin
PHILIPPINES
1800-10-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
1-800-3-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
1-800-8-SAMSUNG
(726-7864)
02-5805777
www.samsung.com/ph
POLAND 0 801 1SAMSUNG
(172678)
022-607-93-33
www.samsung.com/pl
PORTUGAL 80820-SAMSUNG
(726-7864) www.samsung.com/pt
PUERTO RICO 1-800-682-3180 www.samsung.com/latin
REP. DOMINICA 1-800-751-2676 www.samsung.com/latin
EIRE 0818 717 100 www.samsung.com/ie
COUNTRY/REG
ION CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER WEB SITE
Contact SAMSUNG worldwide_136
RUSSIA 8-800-555-55-55 www.samsung.ru
SINGAPORE 1800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864) www.samsung.com/sg
SLOVAKIA 0800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864) www.samsung.com/sk
SOUTH AFRICA 0860 SAMSUNG
(726-7864) www.samsung.com/za
SPAIN 902-1-SAMSUNG(902 172
678) www.samsung.com/es
SWEDEN 0771 726 7864
(SAMSUNG) www.samsung.com/se
SWITZERLAND 0848-SAMSUNG (7267864,
CHF 0.08/min) www.samsung.com/ch
TADJIKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500
TAIWAN 0800-329-999 www.samsung.com/tw
THAILAND 1800-29-3232
02-689-3232 www.samsung.com/th
TRINIDAD &
TOBAGO 1-800-SAMSUNG
(726-7864) www.samsung.com/latin
TURKEY 444 77 11 www.samsung.com/tr
U.A.E 800-SAMSUNG (726-7864)
8000-4726 www.samsung.com/ae
U.K 0845 SAMSUNG
(726-7864) www.samsung.com/uk
U.S.A 1-800-SAMSUNG
(7267864) www.samsung.com/us
UKRAINE 8-800-502-0000 www.samsung/ua
www.
samsung
.com/ua_ru
UZBEKISTAN 8-10-800-500-55-500 www.samsung.com/kz_ru
VENEZUELA 0-800-100-5303 www.samsung.com/latin
VIETNAM 1 800 588 889 www.samsung.com/vn
COUNTRY/REG
ION CUSTOMER CARE
CENTER WEB SITE
© 2009 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.
This user’s guide is provided for information purposes only. All information included herein is subject to change without notice.
Samsung Electronics is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages, arising from or related to use of this user’s guide.
• Samsung and Samsung logo are trademarks of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd.
• PCL and PCL 6 are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows 7 and Windows 2008 Server R2 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• PostScript 3 is a trademark of Adobe System, Inc.
• UFST® and MicroType™ are registered trademarks of Monotype Imaging Inc.
• TrueType, LaserWriter and Macintosh are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
• All other brand or product names are trademarks of their respective companies or organizations.
• Refer to the 'LICENSE.txt' file in the provided CD-ROM for the open source license information.
REV 4.02
Samsung Printer
Software section
1
Software section
Contents
1. Installing Printer Software in Windows
Installing Printer Software ................................................................................................................................................ 5
Installing Software for Local Printing .................................................................................................................... 5
Installing Software for Network Printing ................................................................................................................ 8
Reinstalling Printer Software .......................................................................................................................................... 11
Removing Printer Software ............................................................................................................................................ 12
2. Basic Printing
Printing a Document ....................................................................................................................................................... 13
Printing to a file (PRN) ................................................................................................................................................... 14
Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................................................... 14
Basic Tab ............................................................................................................................................................ 15
Paper Tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 15
Graphics Tab ...................................................................................................................................................... 16
Advanced Tab .................................................................................................................................................... 17
Samsung Tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 17
Using a Favorite Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 17
Using Help .......................................................................................................................................................... 18
3. Advanced Printing
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing) .................................................................................... 19
Printing Posters .............................................................................................................................................................. 20
Printing Booklets ........................................................................................................................................................... 20
Printing on Both Sides of Paper ..................................................................................................................................... 21
Change percentage of your document ........................................................................................................................... 21
Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size ........................................................................................................... 21
2
Using Watermarks .......................................................................................................................................................... 22
Using an Existing Watermark ............................................................................................................................. 22
Creating a Watermark ........................................................................................................................................ 22
Editing a Watermark ........................................................................................................................................... 22
Deleting a Watermark ......................................................................................................................................... 22
Using Overlays ............................................................................................................................................................... 23
What is an Overlay? ........................................................................................................................................... 23
Creating a New Page Overlay ............................................................................................................................ 23
Using a Page Overlay ......................................................................................................................................... 23
Deleting a Page Overlay ..................................................................................................................................... 23
4. Using Windows PostScript Driver
Printer Settings ............................................................................................................................................................... 24
Layout tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 24
Paper/Quality tab ................................................................................................................................................ 25
Using Help .......................................................................................................................................................... 25
5. Using Direct Printing Utility
Overview Direct Printing Utility ....................................................................................................................................... 26
Printing ........................................................................................................................................................................... 26
From the Direct Printing Utility window ............................................................................................................... 26
Using the shortcut icon ....................................................................................................................................... 26
Using the right-click menu .................................................................................................................................. 26
6. Sharing the Printer Locally
Setting Up a Host Computer .......................................................................................................................................... 27
Setting Up a Client Computer ......................................................................................................................................... 27
7. Scanning
Scanning Using SmarThru Office ................................................................................................................................... 28
Starting SmarThru Office .................................................................................................................................... 28
Quick Start Guide ............................................................................................................................................... 28
Using SmarThru Office ....................................................................................................................................... 28
Uninstalling SmarThru Office .............................................................................................................................. 29
3
Scanning Process with TWAIN-enabled Software ......................................................................................................... 30
Scanning Using the WIA Driver ...................................................................................................................................... 30
Windows XP/Server 2003 ................................................................................................................................... 30
Windows Vista .................................................................................................................................................... 30
Windows 7 .......................................................................................................................................................... 30
8. Using Smart Panel
Understanding Smart Panel ........................................................................................................................................... 31
Opening the Troubleshooting Guide .............................................................................................................................. 32
Changing the Smart Panel Program Settings ................................................................................................................ 32
9. Using Your Printer in Linux
Getting Started ............................................................................................................................................................... 33
Installing the Unified Linux Driver ................................................................................................................................... 33
Installing the Unified Linux Driver ....................................................................................................................... 33
Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver ................................................................................................................... 34
Using the Unified Driver Configurator ............................................................................................................................. 35
Opening the Unified Driver Configurator ............................................................................................................ 35
Printers Configuration ......................................................................................................................................... 35
Scanners Configuration ...................................................................................................................................... 36
Ports Configuration ............................................................................................................................................. 36
Configuring Printer Properties ........................................................................................................................................ 37
Printing a Document ....................................................................................................................................................... 37
Printing from Applications ................................................................................................................................... 37
Printing Files ....................................................................................................................................................... 38
Scanning a Document .................................................................................................................................................... 38
Using the Image Manager .................................................................................................................................. 39
10. Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
Installing Software .......................................................................................................................................................... 41
Installing the printer software .............................................................................................................................. 41
Uninstalling the printer software ......................................................................................................................... 41
Setting Up the Printer ..................................................................................................................................................... 42
For a Network-connected ................................................................................................................................... 42
For a USB-connected ......................................................................................................................................... 43
4
Printing ........................................................................................................................................................................... 44
Printing a Document ........................................................................................................................................... 44
Changing Printer Settings ................................................................................................................................... 44
Printer Features .................................................................................................................................................. 46
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper ................................................................................................. 47
Printing on both sides of paper ........................................................................................................................... 47
Scanning ........................................................................................................................................................................ 48
Scanning with USB ............................................................................................................................................. 48
Scanning with network ........................................................................................................................................ 48
Installing Printer Software in Windows
5
1Installing Printer Software in
Windows
This chapter includes:
• Installing Printer Software
• Reinstalling Printer Software
• Removing Printer Software
N
OTE
:
The following procedure is based on Windows XP, for other
operating systems, refer to the corresponding Windows user's guide or
online help.
Installing Printer Software
You can install the printer software for local printing or network printing.
To install the printer software on the computer, perform the appropriate
installation procedure depending on the printer in use.
A printer driver is software that lets your computer communicate with
your printer. The procedure to install drivers may differ depending on the
operating system you are using.
All applications should be closed on your PC before beginning
installation.
Installing Software for Local Printing
A local printer is a printer directly attached to your computer using the
printer cable supplied with your printer, such as a USB or parallel cable.
If your printer is attached to a network, skip this step and go to “Installing
Software for Network Printing” on page 8.
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method.
NOTE
: If the “New Hardware Wizard” window appears during the
installation procedure, click in the upper right corner of the box to
close the window, or click
Cancel
.
Typical Installation
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for
printer operations will be installed.
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window
appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click
Start
and then
Run
. Type
X:\
Setup.exe
, replacing “
X
” with the letter which
represents your drive and click
OK
.
If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008
R2, click
Start
→
All programs
→
Accessories
→
Run
, and type
X:\
Setup.exe
.
If the
AutoPlay
window appears in Windows vista, Windows 7 and
Windows Server 2008 R2, click
Run
Setup.exe
in
Install or run
program
field, and click
Continue
in the
User Account Control
window.
3
Click
Next
.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
4
Select
Typical installation for a local printer
. Click
Next
.
Installing Printer Software in Windows
6
NOTE
: If your printer is not already connected to the computer, the
following window will appear.
• After connecting the printer, click
Next
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click
Next
, and
No
on the following screen. Then the installation will start and a test page
will not be printed at the end of the installation.
• The installation window that appears in this User’s Guide may
differ depending on the printer and interface in use.
5
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test
page appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the
checkbox and click
Next
.
Otherwise, just click
Next
and skip to step 7.
6
If the test page prints out correctly, click
Yes
.
If not, click
No
to reprint it.
7
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to
receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox and click
Finish
. You are now sent to the Samsung web site.
Otherwise, just click
Finish
.
NOTE
: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t work
properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling Printer Software”
on page 11.
Custom Installation
You can choose individual components to install.
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window
appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click
Start
and then
Run
. Type
X:\
Setup.exe
, replacing “
X
” with the letter which
represents your drive and click
OK
.
If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008
R2, click
Start
→
All programs
→
Accessories
→
Run
, and type
X:\
Setup.exe
.
If the
AutoPlay
window appears in Windows vista, Windows 7 and
Windows Server 2008 R2, click
Run
Setup.exe
in
Install or run
program
field, and click
Continue
in the
User Account Control
window.
3
Click
Next
.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
Installing Printer Software in Windows
7
4
Select
Custom installation
. Click
Next
.
5
Select your printer and click
Next
.
NOTE
: If your printer is not already connected to the computer, the
following window will appear.
• After connecting the printer, click
Next
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click
Next
, and
No
on the following screen. Then the installation will start and a test page
will not be printed at the end of the installation.
• The installation window that appears in this User’s Guide may
differ depending on the printer and interface in use.
6
Select the components to be installed and click
Next
.
NOTE
: You can change the desired installation folder by clicking
[
Browse
].
7
After the installation is finished, a window asking you to print a test
page appears. If you choose to print a test page, select the
checkbox and click
Next
.
Otherwise, just click
Next
and skip to step 9.
8
If the test page prints out correctly, click
Yes
.
If not, click
No
to reprint it.
9
To register yourself as a user of Samsung Printers in order to
receive information from Samsung, select the checkbox and click
Finish
. You are now sent to the Samsung web site.
Otherwise, just click
Finish
.
Installing Printer Software in Windows
8
Installing Software for Network Printing
When you connect your printer to a network, you must first configure the
TCP/IP settings for the printer. After you have assigned and verified the
TCP/IP settings, you are ready to install the software on each computer
on the network.
You can install the printer software using the typical or custom method.
Typical Installation
This is recommended for most users. All components necessary for
printer operations will be installed.
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and
powered on. For details about connecting to the network, see the
supplied printer’s User’s Guide.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window
appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click
Start
and then
Run
. Type
X:\
Setup.exe
, replacing “
X
” with the letter which
represents your drive and click
OK
.
If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008
R2, click
Start
→
All programs
→
Accessories
→
Run
, and type
X:\
Setup.exe
.
If the
AutoPlay
window appears in Windows vista, Windows 7 and
Windows Server 2008 R2, click
Run
Setup.exe
in
Install or run
program
field, and click
Continue
in the
User Account Control
window.
3
Click
Next
.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
4
Select
Typical installation for a network printer
. Click
Next
.
5
The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the
printer you want to install from the list and then click
Next
.
•If you do not see your printer on the list, click
Update
to refresh
the list, or select
Add TCP/IP Port
to add your printer to the
network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name
and the IP address for the printer.
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address, print a
Network Configuration page.
•To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select
Shared
Printer [UNC]
and enter the shared name manually or find a
shared printer by clicking the
Browse
button.
NOTE
: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off the
firewall and click
Update
.
For Windows operating system, click
Start
→
Control Panel
and start
windows firewall, and set this option unactivated. For other operating
system, refer to its on-line guide.
Installing Printer Software in Windows
9
6
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to
print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung
Printers in order to receive information from Samsung. If you so
desire, select the corresponding checkbox(es) and click
Finish
.
Otherwise, just click
Finish
.
NOTE
: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t work
properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling Printer Software”
on page 11.
Custom Installation
You can choose individual components to install and set a specific IP
address.
1
Make sure that the printer is connected to your network and
powered on. For details about connecting to the network, see the
supplied printer’s User’s Guide.
2
Insert the supplied CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive.
The CD-ROM should automatically run, and an installation window
appears.
If the installation window does not appear, click
Start
and then
Run
. Type
X:\
Setup.exe
, replacing “
X
” with the letter which
represents your drive and click
OK
.
If you use Windows vista, Windows 7 and Windows Server 2008
R2, click
Start
→
All programs
→
Accessories
→
Run
, and type
X:\
Setup.exe
.
If the
AutoPlay
window appears in Windows vista, Windows 7 and
Windows Server 2008 R2, click
Run
Setup.exe
in
Install or run
program
field, and click
Continue
in the
User Account Control
window.
3
Click
Next
.
• If necessary, select a language from the drop-down list.
4
Select
Custom installation
. Click
Next
.
5
The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the
printer you want to install from the list and then click
Next
.
•If you do not see your printer on the list, click
Update
to refresh
the list, or select
Add TCP/IP Port
to add your printer to the
network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name
and the IP address for the printer.
Installing Printer Software in Windows
10
To verify your printer’s IP address or the MAC address, print a
Network Configuration page.
•To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select
Shared
Printer [UNC]
and enter the shared name manually or find a
shared printer by clicking the
Browse
button.
NOTE
: If you cannot find your machine in network, please turn off the
firewall and click
Update
.
For Windows operating system, click
Start
→
Control Panel
and start
windows firewall, and set this option unactivated. For other operating
system, refer to its on-line guide.
TIP
: If you want to set a specific IP address on a specific network
printer, click the
Set IP Address
button. The Set IP Address window
appears. Do as follows:
a. Select a printer to be set with a specific IP address from the list.
b. Configure an IP address, subnet mask, and gateway for the printer
manually and click
Configure
to set the specific IP address for the
network printer.
• Click
Next
.
6
Select the components to be installed and click
Next
.
NOTE
: You can change the desired installation folder by clicking
[
Browse
].
7
Select the components to be installed. After selecting the
components, the following window appears. You can also change
the printer name, set the printer to be shared on the network, set
the printer as the default printer, and change the port name of each
printer. Click
Next
.
To install this software on a server, select the
Setting up this
printer on a server
checkbox.
8
After the installation is finished, a window appears asking you to
print a test page and to register yourself as a user of Samsung
Printers in order to receive information from Samsung. If you so
desire, select the corresponding checkbox(es) and click
Finish
.
Otherwise, just click
Finish
.
NOTE
: After setup is complete, if your printer driver doesn’t work
properly, reinstall the printer driver. See “Reinstalling Printer Software”
on page 11.
Installing Printer Software in Windows
11
Reinstalling Printer Software
You can reinstall the software if installation fails.
1
Start Windows.
2
From the
Start
menu select
Programs
or
All Programs
→
your
printer driver name
→
Maintenance
.
3
Select
Repair
and click
Next
.
4
The list of printers available on the network appears. Select the
printer you want to install from the list and then click
Next
.
•If you do not see your printer on the list, click
Update
to refresh
the list, or select
Add TCP/IP Port
to add your printer to the
network. To add the printer to the network, enter the port name
and the IP address for the printer.
•To find a shared network printer (UNC Path), select
Shared
Printer [UNC]
and enter the shared name manually or find a
shared printer by clicking the
Browse
button.
You will see a component list so that you can reinstall any item
individually.
NOTE
: If your printer is not already connected to the computer, the
following window will appear.
• After connecting the printer, click
Next
.
• If you don’t want to connect the printer at this time, click
Next
, and
No
on the following screen. Then the installation will start and a test page
will not be printed at the end of the installation.
•
The reinstallation window that appears in this User’s Guide may
differ depending on the printer and interface in use.
5
Select the components you want to reinstall and click
Next
.
If you installed the printer software for local printing and
you
select
your printer driver name
, the window asking you to print a
test page appears. Do as follows:
a. To print a test page, select the check box and click
Next
.
b. If the test page prints out correctly, click
Yes
.
If it doesn’t, click
No
to reprint it.
6
When the reinstallation is done, click
Finish
.
Installing Printer Software in Windows
12
Removing Printer Software
1
Start Windows.
2
From the
Start
menu select
Programs
or
All Programs
→
your
printer driver name
→
Maintenance
.
3
Select
Remove
and click
Next
.
You will see a component list so that you can remove any item
individually.
4
Select the components you want to remove and then click
Next
.
5
When your computer asks you to confirm your selection, click
Yes
.
The selected driver and all of its components are removed from
your computer.
6
After the software is removed, click
Finish
.
Basic Printing
13
2Basic Printing
This chapter explains the printing options and common printing tasks in
Windows.
This chapter includes:
• Printing a Document
• Printing to a file (PRN)
• Printer Settings
- Basic Tab
- Paper Tab
- Graphics Tab
- Advanced Tab
- Samsung Tab
- Using a Favorite Setting
- Using Help
Printing a Document
N
OTES
:
• Your printer driver
Properties
window that appears in this User’s
Guide may differ depending on the printer in use. However the
composition of the printer properties window is similar.
•
Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with your
printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer
Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can check the
supplied CD-ROM.
• When you select an option in printer properties, you may see an
exclamationmark or mark. An exclamation mark means you
can select that certain option but it is not recommended, and
mark means you cannot select that option due to the machine’s
setting or environment.
The following procedure describes the general steps required for printing
from various Windows applications. The exact steps for printing a
document may vary depending on the application program you are
using. Refer to the User’s Guide of your software application for the
exact printing procedure.
1
Open the document you want to print.
2
Select
Print
from the
File
menu. The Print window is displayed. It
may look slightly different depending on your application.
The basic print settings are selected within the Print window. These
settings include the number of copies and print range.
3
Select your machine from the
Select Printer
list.
The basic print settings including the number of copies and print
range are selected within the
Print
window.
To take advantage of the printer features provided by your printer
driver, click
Properties
or
Preferences
in the application’s Print
window. For details, see “Printer Settings” on page 14.
4
To start the print job, click
OK
or
Print
in the Print window.
N
OTE
: If you are using Windows Internet Explorer, the
AnyWeb Print
too will save your time for screen-captured images or printing the
image. Click
Start
>
All programs
>
your printer driver name
>
AnyWeb Print
to link the website where the tool is available for the
download.
Make sure that your
printer is selected.
Basic Printing
14
Printing to a file (PRN)
You will sometimes need to save the print data as a file for your purpose.
To create a file:
1
Check the
Print to file
box at the
Print
window.
2
Select the folder and assign a name of the file and then click
OK
.
Printer Settings
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to access
all of the printer options you need when using your printer. When the
printer properties are displayed, you can review and change the settings
needed for your print job.
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your operating
system. This Software User’s Guide shows the Properties window for
Windows XP.
Your printer driver
Properties
window that appears in this User’s Guide
may differ depending on the printer in use.
If you access printer properties through the Printers folder, you can view
additional Windows-based tabs (refer to your Windows User’s Guide).
N
OTES
:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the
printer driver. Change all print settings available in the software
application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer
driver.
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the
current program.
To make your changes permanent
, make them in
the Printers folder.
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows OS,
refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online help.
1. Click the Windows
Start
button.
2. Select Printers and Faxes.
3. Select your printer driver icon.
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select
Printing Preferences.
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.
Basic Printing
15
Basic Tab
Use
Basic
tab to adjust how the document appear on the printed page.
Click the
Basic
tab to display the options shown below.
Orientation
This option allows you to select the direction in which information is
printed on a page.
•Portrait: This option prints across the width of the page, letter
style.
•Landscape: This option prints across the length of the page,
spreadsheet style.
•Rotate 180 Degrees: This option allows you to rotate the page,
180 degrees.
Quality
The available Quality options may vary depending on your
machine. The higher the setting, the sharper the clarity of printed
characters and graphics. The higher setting may also increase the
printing time of a document.
Layout Options
This option allows you to select various ways to layout your
document.
•Single Page Per Side: This option is a basic layout option. This
option allows you to print a page on one side of a paper.
•Multiple Pages Per Side: This option allows you to print several
pages on one side of a paper. (See “Printing Multiple Pages on
One Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)” on page 19.)
▲ Landscape
▲ Portrait
•Poster Printing: This option allows you to print your document
into a poster-size document. This option prints your document into
several pages. Paste printed pages together to form one poster-
size document. (See “Printing Posters” on page 20)
•Booklet Printing: This option allows you to print your document
on both sides of the paper to make into a booklet. (See “Printing
Booklets” on page 20.)
Double-Sided Printing
This option allows you to print on both sides of paper. (See “Printing
on Both Sides of Paper” on page 21.)
Paper Tab
Use the
Paper
tab options to set the basic paper handling specifications
.
Click the
Paper
tab to display the options shown below.
Copies
This option allows you to choose the number of copies to be printed.
You can select 1 to 999 copies.
Paper Options
This option allows you to choose paper tray you want to use.
N
OTE
: When printing on an envelope, select the
Envelope
tab to set
the options.
•Size: This option allows you to set the size of paper to be loaded
in the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you can select it.
•Source: Make sure that Source is set to the corresponding paper
tray. Use MP Tray when printing on special materials, such as
envelopes and transparencies.
•Type: This option allows you to set the type of paper to be loaded
in the tray. This setting appears in the list, so that you can select it.
This will let you get the best quality printout. If not, the desired
print quality may not be achieved.
Basic Printing
16
- Plain: Normal plain paper. Select this type if your machine is
monochrome and printing on the 60 g./m2 (16 lb) cotton paper.
- Thick: 90 to 105 g/m2 (24 to 28 lb) thick paper.
- Thin: 60 to 70 g/m2 (16 to 19 lb) thin paper.
- Cotton: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) cotton paper such as Gilbert
25 % and Gilbert 100 %.
- Color: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) color-backgrounded paper.
- Preprinted: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) preprinted paper.
- Recycled: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) recycled paper.
- Envelope: 75 to 90 g/m2 (20 to 24 lb) envelope.
- Transparency: 138 to 146 g/m2 (37 to 39 lb) transparency
paper.
- Labels: 120 to 150 g/m2 (32 to 40 lb) label.
- CardStock: 90 to 163 g/m2 (24 to 43 lb) cardstock.
- Bond: 105 to 120 g/m2 (28 to 32 lb) bond.
- Archive: 70 to 90 g/m2 (19 to 24 lb) If you need to keep the
print-out for a long period time, such as archives, select this
option.
•Advanced: This option allows you to print the first page using a
different paper type from the rest of the document by choosing the
tray to use for printing the first page. For example, if you want to
print the first page using color paper, load color paper into the MP
Tray, and plain paper into Tray 1. Then, select Tray 1. in the
Source option and MP Tray in this
Advanced
option.
N
OTE
:
If you click Reset, settings i
n the
Advanced
optio
n returns to
the default setting.
Scaling Options
This option allows you to automatically or manually scale your print
job on a page. This option can be grayed out according to the
Layout Options setting in the Basic tab.
•Fit to Page: This option allows you to scale your print job to any
selected paper size regardless of the document size. (See “Fitting
Your Document to a Selected Paper Size” on page 21.)
•Percentage: This option allows you to change the size of a page’s
contents to appear larger or smaller on the printed page by typing
in a percentage you want. (See “Change percentage of your
document” on page 21.)
Graphics Tab
Use the
Graphics
tab options to adjust the print quality for your specific
printing needs.
Click the
Graphics
tab to display the options shown below.
Font/Text
Check All Text Black box to print all the texts in your document in
solid black, regardless of the color it appears on the screen.
Advanced
•Download as Outline: This option allows the driver to download
any TrueType fonts that are used in your document not stored
(resident) on your machine. If, after printing a document, you find
that the fonts did not print correctly, choose Download as Bit
Image and resubmit your print job. This feature is available only
when you use the PCL printer driver.
•Download as Bit Image: This option allows the driver to
download the font data as bitmap images. Documents with
complicated fonts, such as Korean or Chinese, or various other
fonts, will print faster in this setting. Download as Bit Image is
useful when printing from Adobe programs.
•Print as Graphics: This option allows the driver to download any
fonts as graphics. When printing documents with high graphic
content and relatively few TrueType fonts, printing performance
(speed) may be enhanced in this setting.
•Use Printer Fonts: When Use Printer Fonts is checked, the
printer uses the fonts that are stored in its memory (resident fonts)
to print your document, rather than downloading the fonts used in
your document. Because downloading fonts takes time, selecting
this option can speed up your printing time. When using Printer
fonts, the printer will try to match the fonts used in your document
to those stored in its memory. If, however, you use fonts in your
document that are very different from those resident in the printer,
your printed output will appear very different from what it looks like
on the screen.
Basic Printing
17
N
OTE
:
If you click Reset, settings i
n the
Advanced
optio
n returns to
the default setting.
Toner Save
This option allows you to extend the life of your toner cartridge and
reduces the cost per page without a significant reduction in print
quality.
•On: This option to allows the printer to use less toner on each
page.
•Off: If you do not need to save toner when printing a document,
select this option.
Advanced Tab
Use the
Advanced
tab to set various printing options.
Click the
Advanced
tab to display the options shown below.
Watermark
This option allows you to print text over an existing document. (See
“Using Watermarks” on page 22.)
Overlay
Overlays are often used to take the place of letterhead paper. (See
“Using Overlays” on page 23.)
Output options
This options allows you to set the sequence in which the pages will
print. Select the print order from the drop-down list.
•Normal: This option allows you to print all pages from the first
page to the last page.
•Reverse All Pages: This option allows you to print all pages from
the last page to the first page.
•Print Odd Pages: This option allows you to print only the odd
numbered pages of the document.
•Print Even Pages: This option allows you to print only the even
numbered pages of the document.
•Advanced: This option allows you to set advanced output options
for printing, such as printing an information page, and saving as a
form to later use as an overlay.
•Staple: Do the stapling on the printouts.
•Request Offset: If you want the printouts to be sorted the same
way as the original, the machine places printout sets slightly offset
from one another.
N
OTE
: If you click
Reset
, settings in the
Advanced
option returns to
the default setting.
Job Settings
This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file
by using the HDD.
•Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal which is for
printing without saving the printing file in the HDD.
•User ID: This option is used when you need to find a saved file
using the control panel.
•Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a saved file
using the control panel.
Samsung Tab
Use the
Samsung
tab to display the copyright and the version number
of the driver. If your computer is connected to the Internet, you can have
access to following services:
Click the
Samsung
tab to display the options.
Help
This option allows you to open the Help file by searching a keyword.
Service
•Buy Supplies: This option allows you to order supplies on-line.
•Samsung Website: This option directly connects you to
Samsung Website.
•Registration: This option allows you to register your machine.
•Check for updates: This option allows you to download updates
for your printer driver.
Using a Favorite Setting
The
Presets
option, which is visible on each preferences tab except for
Samsung
tab, allows you to save the current preferences settings for
future use.
To save a
Presets
item:
1
Change the settings as needed on each tab.
Basic Printing
18
2
Enter a name for the item in the
Presets
input box.
3
Click
Save
. When you save
Presets
, all current driver settings are
saved.
To use a saved setting, select it from the
Presets
drop down list. The
machine is now set to print according to the setting you selected.
To delete saved setting, select it from the
Presets
drop down list and
click
Delete
.
You can also restore the printer driver’s default settings by selecting
Printer Default
from the
Presets
drop down list.
Using Help
Click from the upper-right corner of the window, and then click on any
option. The help screen gives detailed information about the printing
features provided by the printer driver.
Advanced Printing
19
3Advanced Printing
This chapter explains printing options and advanced printing tasks.
N
OTE
:
• Your printer driver
Properties
window that appears in this User’s
Guide may differ depending on the printer in use. However the
composition of the printer properties window is similar.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can check the
supplied CD-ROM.
This chapter includes:
• Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of Paper (N-Up Printing)
• Printing Posters
• Printing Booklets
• Printing on Both Sides of Paper
• Change percentage of your document
• Fitting Your Document to a Selected Paper Size
• Using Watermarks
• Using Overlays
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet
of Paper (N-Up Printing)
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of paper.
To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be reduced in size
and arranged in the order you specify. You can print up to 16 pages on
one sheet.
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.
2
From the
Basic
tab, choose
Multiple Pages Per Side
in the
Type
drop-down list.
3
Select the number of pages you want to print per sheet
(1, 2, 4, 6, 9, or 16) in the
Pages per Side
drop-down list.
4
Select the page order from the
Page Order
drop-down list, if
necessary.
Check
Print Page Border
to print a border around each page on
the sheet.
5
Click the
Paper
tab, select the
Size
,
Source
, and
Type
.
6
Click
OK
and print the document.
1 2
3 4
Advanced Printing
20
Printing Posters
This feature allows you to print a single-page document onto 4, 9, or 16
sheets of paper, for the purpose of pasting the sheets together to form
one poster-size document.
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.
2
Click the
Basic
tab, select
Poster Printing
in the
Type
drop-down
list.
3
Configure the poster option:
You can select the page layout from
Poster<2x2>
,
Poster<3x3>
,
or
Poster<4x4>
. If you select
Poster<2x2>
, the output will be
automatically stretched to cover 4 physical pages.
Specify an overlap in millimeters or inches to make it easier to
pasting the sheets together.
4
Click the
Paper
tab, select the
Size
,
Source
, and
Type
.
5
Click
OK
and print the document. You can complete the poster by
pasting the sheets together.
0.15 inches
0.15 inches
Printing Booklets
This printer feature allows you to print your document on both sides of
the paper and arranges the pages so that the paper can be folded in half
after printing to produce a booklet.
N
OTE
: If you want to make a booklet, you need to print on Letter,
Legal, A4, Us Folio, or Oficio sized print media.
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
the printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.
2
From the
Basic
tab, choose
Booklet Printing
from the
Type
drop-
down list.
3
Click the
Paper
tab, select the
Size
,
Source
, and
Type
.
N
OTE
: The
Booklet Printing
option is not available for all paper sizes.
In order to find out the available paper size for this feature, select the
available paper size in the
Size
option on the
Paper
tab.
If you select an unavailable paper size, this option can be automatically
canceled. Select only available paper. (paper without or
mark).
4
Click
OK
and print the document.
5
After printing, fold and staple the pages.
8
9
8
9
Advanced Printing
21
Printing on Both Sides of Paper
You can print on both sides of a paper; duplex. Before printing, decide
how you want your document oriented. You can only use this feature with
Letter, Legal, A4, US Folio, or Oficio sized paper.
The options are:
•Printer Setting, if you select this option, this feature is
determined by the setting you’ve made on the control panel of the
printer.
•None
•Long Edge, which is the conventional layout used in book
binding.
•
Short Edge
, which is the type often used with calendars.
•Reverse Duble-Sided Printing, allows you to select general
print order compare to duplex print order.
N
OTE
: Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies, envelopes,
or thick paper. Paper jamming and damage to the printer may result.
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. “Printing a Document” on page 13.
2
From the
Basic
tab, select the paper orientation.
3
From the
Double-sided Printing
section, select the binding option
you want.
4
Click the
Paper
tab, select the
Size
,
Source
, and
Type
.
5
Click
OK
and print the document.
N
OTE
: If your printer does not have a duplex unit, you should complete
the printing job manually. The printer prints every other page of the
document first. After printing the first side of your job, the Printing Tip
window appears. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the
printing job.
Long Edge
▲ Short Edge
▲
25
3
2
5
3
25
3
2
53
Change percentage of your document
You can change the size of a page’s content to appear larger or smaller
on the printed page.
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.
2
From the
Paper
tab.
3
Enter the scaling rate in the
Percentage
input box.
You can also click the up/down arrows to select the scaling rate.
4
Select the
Size
,
Source
, and
Type
in
Paper Options
.
5
Click
OK
and print the document.
Fitting Your Document to a Selected
Paper Size
This printer feature allows you to scale your print job to any selected
paper size regardless of the digital document size. This can be useful
when you want to check fine details on a small document.
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.
2
From the
Paper
tab.
3
Select the paper size you want from the
Fit to page
.
4
Select the
Size
,
Source
, and
Type
in
Paper Options
.
5
Click
OK
and print the document.
A
Advanced Printing
22
Using Watermarks
The Watermark option allows you to print text over an existing document.
For example, you may want to have large gray letters reading “DRAFT”
or “CONFIDENTIAL” printed diagonally across the first page or all pages
of a document.
There are several predefined watermarks that come with the printer, and
they can be modified, or you can add new ones to the list.
Using an Existing Watermark
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.
2
Click the
Advanced
tab, and select the desired watermark from the
Watermark
drop-down list. You will see the selected watermark in
the preview image.
3
Click
OK
and start printing.
N
OTE
: The preview image shows how the page will look when it is
printed.
Creating a Watermark
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.
2
From the
Advanced
tab, select
Edit
from the
Watermark
drop-
down list. The
Edit Watermarks
window appears.
3
Enter a text message in the
Watermark Message
box. You can
enter up to 256 characters. The message displays in the preview
window.
When the
First Page Only
box is checked, the watermark prints on
the first page only.
4
Select watermark options.
You can select the font name, style, size, and shade from the
Font
Attributes
section, as well as set the angle of the watermark from
the
Message Angle
section.
5
Click
Add
to add a new watermark to the
Current Watermaks
list.
6
When you have finished editing, click
OK
or
Print
until you exit the
Print
window.
To stop printing the watermark, select
None
from the
Watermark
drop-
down list.
Editing a Watermark
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.
2
From the
Advanced
tab, select
Edit
from the
Watermark
drop-
down list. The
Edit Watermarks
window appears.
3
Select the watermark you want to edit from the
Current
Watermaks
list and change the watermark message and options.
4
Click
Update
to save the changes.
5
Click
OK
or
Print
until you exit the
Print
window.
Deleting a Watermark
1
To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.
2
From the
Advanced
tab, select
Edit
from the
Watermark
drop-
down list. The
Edit Watermarks
window appears.
3
Select the watermark you want to delete from the
Current
Watermaks
list and click
Delete
.
4
Click
OK
or
Print
until you exit the
Print
window.
Advanced Printing
23
Using Overlays
What is an Overlay?
An overlay is text and/or images stored in the computer hard disk drive
(HDD) as a special file format that can be printed on any document.
Overlays are often used to take the place of preprinted forms and
letterhead paper. Rather than using preprinted letterhead, you can
create an overlay containing the exact same information that is currently
on your letterhead. To print a letter with your company’s letterhead, you
do not need to load preprinted letterhead paper in the printer. You need
only tell the printer to print the letterhead overlay on your document.
Creating a New Page Overlay
To use a page overlay, you must create a new page overlay containing
your logo or image.
1
Create or open a document containing text or an image for use in a
new page overlay. Position the items exactly as you wish them to
appear when printed as an overlay.
2
To save the document as an overlay, access printer properties. See
“Printing a Document” on page 13.
3
From the
Advanced
tab, select
Edit
from the
Text
drop-down list.
The
Edit Overlay
window appears.
4
In the
Edit Overlay
window, click
Create
.
5
In the
Save As
window, type a name of up to eight characters in
the
File name
box. Select the destination path, if necessary. (The
default is C:\Formover.)
6
Click
Save
. The name appears on the
Overlay List
.
7
Click
OK
or
Print
until you exit the
Print
window.
The file is not printed. Instead it is stored on your computer hard
disk drive.
N
OTE
: The overlay document size must be the same as the documents
you print with the overlay. Do not create an overlay with a watermark.
WORLD BEST
Dear ABC
Regards
WORLD BEST
Using a Page Overlay
After an overlay has been created, it is ready to be printed with your
document. To print an overlay with a document:
1
Create or open the document you want to print.
2
To change the print settings from your software application, access
printer properties. See “Printing a Document” on page 13.
3
Click the
Advanced
tab.
4
Select the desired overlay from the
Text
drop-down list.
5
If the overlay file you want does not appear in the
Text
drop-down
list, select
Edit
from the list and click
Load
. Select the overlay file
you want to use.
If you have stored the overlay file you want to use in an external
source, you can also load the file when you access the
Load
window.
After you select the file, click
Open
. The file appears in the
Overlay
List
box and is available for printing. Select the overlay from the
Overlay List
box.
6
If necessary, check
Confirm Page Overlay When Printing
box. If
this box is checked, a message window appears each time you
submit a document for printing, asking you to confirm your wish to
print an overlay on your document.
If this box is not checked and an overlay has been selected, the
overlay automatically prints with your document.
7
Click
OK
or
Print
until you exit the
Print
window.
The selected overlay prints on your document.
N
OTE
: The resolution of the overlay document must be the same as
that of the document you will print with the overlay.
Deleting a Page Overlay
You can delete page overlays that you no longer use.
1
In the printer properties window, click the
Advanced
tab.
2
Select
Edit
in the
Overlay
drop down list.
3
Select the overlay you want to delete from the
Overlay List
box.
4
Click
Delete
.
5
When a confirming message window appears, click
Yes
.
6
Click
OK
or
Print
until you exit the
Print
window.
Using Windows PostScript Driver
24
4Using Windows PostScript
Driver
If you want to use the PostScript driver provided with your system CD-
ROM to print a document.
PPDs, in combination with the PostScript driver, access printer features
and allow the computer to communicate with the printer. An installation
program for the Windows PostScript drivers is provided on the supplied
software CD-ROM.
Printer Settings
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to access
all of the printer options you need when using your printer. When the
printer properties are displayed, you can review and change the settings
needed for your print job.
Your printer properties window may differ, depending on your operating
system. This Software User’s Guide shows the Properties window for
Windows XP.
Your printer driver
Properties
window that appears in this User’s Guide
may differ depending on the printer in use.
N
OTES
:
• Most Windows applications will override settings you specify in the
printer driver. Change all print settings available in the software
application first, and change any remaining settings using the printer
driver.
• The settings you change remain in effect only while you are using the
current program.
To make your changes permanent
, make them in
the Printers folder.
• The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows OS,
refer to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online help.
1. Click the Windows Start button.
2. Select Printers and Faxes.
3. Select your printer driver icon.
4. Right-click on the printer driver icon and select
Printing Preferences.
5. Change the settings on each tab, click OK.
Layout tab
The
Layout
tab provides options to adjust how the document appears
on the printed page.
Orientation
This option allows you to select the direction in which the
information is printed on a page.
•
Portrait
: This option prints across the width of the page, letter
style.
•
Landscape
: This option prints across the length of the page,
spreadsheet style.
•
Rotate Landscape
: This option allows you to rotate the page, 180
degrees.
Print on Both Sides
You can print on both sides of a sheet of paper. Before printing,
decide how you want your document oriented.
•
None
•
Flip on Long Edge
: This option is the conventional layout used in
bookbinding.
•
Flip on Short Edge
: This option is the type often used with
calendars.
N
OTE
:
Do not print on both sides of labels, transparencies,
envelopes, or thick papers. It may result in paper jam and damage
to the machine.
Long Edge
▲ Short Edge
▲
25
3
2
5
3
25
3
2
53
Using Windows PostScript Driver
25
Pages Per Sheet
You can select the number of pages to print on a single sheet of
paper. To print more than one page per sheet, the pages will be
reduced in size and arranged in the order you specify. You can print
up to 16 pages on one sheet.
Advanced
You can select
Paper Size
,
Graphic
, and
Document Options
.
•
Paper/Output
: This option allows you to select the size of the
paper loaded in the tray.
•
Graphic
: This option allows you to adjust the print quality for your
specific printing needs.
•
Document Options
: This options allow you to set the PostScript
options or printer features.
Paper/Quality tab
You can select paper tray and media type.
•
Paper Source
: This option allows you to choose which tray to use.
•
Media
: This option allows you to choose which media to use.
Using Help
You can click from the upper right corner of the window, and then
click on any setting.
Using Direct Printing Utility
26
5Using Direct Printing Utility
This chapter explains how to use Direct Printing Utility to print PDF files
without having to open the files.
C
AUTION
• HDD should be installed on your machine, to print PDF files using this
program.
• You cannot print PDF files that are restricted to print. Deactivate the
printing restriction feature, and retry printing.
• You cannot print PDF files that are restricted by a password.
Deactivate the password feature, and retry printing.
• Whether or not a PDF file can be printed using the
Direct Printing
Utility
program depends on how the PDF file was created.
•The
Direct Printing Utility
program supports the PDF version
1.4 and below. For a higher version, you must open the file to print it.
Overview Direct Printing Utility
Direct Printing Utility is a program that sends a PDF file directly to your
printer without having to open the file. It sends data through the Windows
spooler using the port of the printer driver. It only supports PDF format.
To installing this program, you should select
Custom installation
and
put a check mark in this program when you install the printer driver.
Printing
There are several ways you can print using Direct Printing Utility.
From the Direct Printing Utility window
1
From the
Start
menu select
Programs
or
All Programs
→
Samsung Printers
→
Direct Printing Utility
→
Direct Printing
Utility
.
Or, double-click the Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk
top.
The Direct Printing Utility window opens.
2
Select the printer you will use in the Select Printer section and click
Browse
.
3
Select the PDF file you will print and click
Open
.
The PDF file is added in the Select Files section.
4
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the next column.
5
Click
Print
.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.
Using the shortcut icon
1
Select the PDF file you will print and by dragging drop it to the
Direct Printing Utility shortcut icon on your desk top.
The selected PDF file is sent to the default printer.
N
OTE
:
If the default printer does not support Direct Printing Utility,
the message window alerting you to select the appropriate printer
opens. Select the appropriate printer in the Select Printer section.
2
Customize the printer settings for your needs.
3
Click
Print
.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.
Using the right-click menu
1
Right-click on the PDF file you will print and select
Direct Printing
.
The Direct Printing Utility window opens with the PDF file is added.
2
Select the printer you will use.
3
Customize the printer settings for your needs. See the below part.
4
Click
Print
.
The selected PDF file is sent to the printer.
Sharing the Printer Locally
27
6Sharing the Printer Locally
You can connect the printer directly to a selected computer, which is
called “host computer,” on the network.
The following procedure is for Windows XP. For other Windows OS, refer
to the corresponding Windows User's Guide or online help.
N
OTES
:
• Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with your printer.
Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer Specifications
in your Printer User’s Guide.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can check the
supplied CD-ROM.
Setting Up a Host Computer
1
Start Windows.
2
From the
Start
menu select
Printers and Faxes
.
3
Double-click
your printer driver icon
.
4
From the
Printer
menu, select
Sharing
.
5
Check the
Share this printer
box.
6
Fill in the
Shared Name
field, and then click
OK
.
Setting Up a Client Computer
1
Right-click the Windows
Start
button and select
Explore
.
2
Select
My Network Places
and then right-click
Search for
Computers
.
3
Fill in the IP address of host computer in
Computer name
field,
and click
Search
. (In case host computer requires
User name
and
Password
, fill in User ID and password of host computer account.)
4
Double-click
Printers and Faxes
.
5
Right-click printer driver icon, select
Connect
.
6
Click
Yes
, if the installation confirm message appears.
Scanning
28
7Scanning
Scanning with your machine lets you turn pictures and text into digital
files on your computer. Then you can fax or e-mail the files, display them
on your web site or use them to create projects that you can print using
Samsung SmarThru software or the WIA driver.
This chapter includes:
• Scanning Using SmarThru Office
• Scanning Process with TWAIN-enabled Software
• Scanning Using the WIA Driver
N
OTES
:
•
Check the Operating System(s) that are compatible with your
printer. Please refer to the OS Compatibility section of Printer
Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.
•
You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-ROM.
•
The maximum resolution that can be achieved depends upon
various factors, including computer speed, available disk space,
memory, the size of the image being scanned, and bit depth
settings. Thus, depending on your system and what you are
scanning, you may not be able to scan at certain resolutions,
especially using enhanced dpi.
Scanning Using SmarThru Office
Samsung
SmarThru Office
is the accompanying software for your
machine. You can use
SmarThru Office
to scan images or documents
from local or network scanners.
Starting SmarThru Office
Follow the steps below to start
SmarThru Office
:
1
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and
properly connected to each other.
2
Once you have installed
SmarThru Office
, you will see the
SmarThru Office
icon on your desktop.
3
Double-click the
SmarThru Office
icon.
4
The
SmarThru Office
appears.
For more information, click
Help
>
SmarThru Office Help
.
Quick Start Guide
This menu displays direct buttons for some features. The direct buttons
include:
Categories
,
Binder
,
Life Cycle
,
Scan and OCR
,
Fix and
Enhance
, and
Samsung Website
. You can disable this menu by
checking “
Do not show this diaglog again
”.
Using SmarThru Office
Scanning
1
Click
Scan
icon.
N
OTES
:
• In Windows XP operating system, you can use
SmarThru Office
launcher, which is on the right end of taskbar, to easily open the
Scan
Setting
window.
•
In other operating systems beside Windows XP, click the
SmarThru Office
icon in the tray area of the windows taskbar
Scanning
29
to activate the
SmarThru Office
launcher.
2
Scan Setting
window opens.
•
Select Scanner
: Allows you to select between the Local or
Network scanner.
•
Select Profile
: Allows you to save settings frequently used for
future use. Click
New Profile
to save the setting.
•
Scan Settings
: Allows you to customize settings for
Scan Size
and
Paper Source
.
•
Scan To
: Allows you to customize settings for
File Name
and
location to send scanned data.
N
OTE
: Click
Advanced
button to set more scan options.
3
Set scan settings and click
Scan
.
For more information, click
Help
>
SmarThru Office Help
.
Scan To
FTP
You can upload files to an FTP server while working on
SmarThru
Office
.
1
Select
File
>
Send to
>
Send By FTP
.
2
Send By FTP
window opens.
3
Add your file and click
Upload
.
Email
You can send email while working on
SmarThru Office
.
N
OTE
:
You need an email client program, such as
Outlook Express
,
to send email in
SmarThru Office
. Procedure for sending email may
differ depending on email client program you are using.
1
Select
File
>
Send to
>
Send By E-mail
.
2
An email client opens.
3
Type in necessary information and send your email.
Fax
You can send emails while working on
SmarThru Office
.
1
Select
File
>
Send to
>
Send By Fax
.
2
Send Fax
window opens.
3
Type in necessary information and click
Send Fax
.
N
OTE
: For more information about
SmarThru Office
, click
Help
>
SmarThru Office Help
. The
SmarThru Office Help
window appears;
you can view on screen help supplied on the SmarThru program.
Uninstalling SmarThru Office
N
OTE
: Before beginning uninstallation, ensure that all applications are
closed on your computer.
1
From the
Start
menu select
Programs
or
All Programs
→
Samsung Printers
→
SmarThru Office
→
Uninstall SmarThru
Office
.
2
When your computer asks you to confirm, read the statement and
click
OK
.
3
Click
Finish
.
Scanning
30
Scanning Process with TWAIN-
enabled Software
If you want to scan documents using other software, you will need to use
TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe Photoshop. The first time
you scan with your machine, select it as your TWAIN source in the
application you use.
The basic scanning process involves a number of steps:
1
Make sure that your machine and computer are turned on and
properly connected to each other.
2
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
3
Open an application, such as Photoshop.
4
Open the TWAIN window and set the scan options.
5
Scan and save your scanned image.
N
OTE
: You need to follow the program’s instructions for acquiring an
image. Please refer to the user’s guide of the application.
Scanning Using the WIA Driver
Your machine also supports the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver
for scanning images. WIA is one of the standard components provided
by Microsoft
®
Windows
®
XP and works with digital cameras and
scanners. Unlike the TWAIN driver, the WIA driver allows you to scan
and easily manipulate images without using additional software.
N
OTE
: The WIA driver works only on Windows XP/Server 2003/Vista/7
with USB port.
Windows XP/Server 2003
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
2
From the
Start
menu on your desktop window, select
Settings
,
Control Panel
, and then
Scanners and Cameras
.
3
Double click
your scanner driver
icon. The Scanner and Camera
Wizard launches.
4
Choose your scanning preferences and click
Preview
to see how
your preferences affect the picture.
5
Click
Next
.
6
Enter a picture name, and select a file format and destination to
save the picture.
7
Follow the on-screen instructions to edit the picture after it is copied
to your computer.
Windows Vista
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
2
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
→
Scanners and Cameras
.
3
Click on
Scan a document or picture
. Then
Windows Fax and
Scan
application is opened automatically.
N
OTE
:
• To view scanners, user can click on
View scanners and cameras
.
• If there is not
Scan a document or picture
, open the MS paint
program and click
From Scanner or Camera...
on
File
menu.
4
Click
Scan
and then scan driver is opened.
5
Choose your scanning preferences and click
Preview
to see your
preferences affect the picture.
6
Click
Scan
.
N
OTE
: If you want to cancel the scan job, press the
Cancel
button on
the
Scanners and Cameras
Wizard.
Windows 7
1
Load the document(s) face up into the DADF (or ADF).
OR
Place a single document face down on the document glass.
2
Click
Start
→
Control Panel
→
Hardware and Sound
→
D
evices and Printers
.
3
Click right button of mouse on device driver icon in
Printers and
Faxes
→
Start Scan
.
New Scan
application appears.
4
Choose your scanning preferences and click
Preview
to see your
preferences affect the picture.
5
Click
Scan
.
Using Smart Panel
31
8Using Smart Panel
Smart Panel is a program that monitors and informs you of the status of
the printer, and allows you to customize the printer’s settings. If you are
a Windows or Macintosh OS user, Smart Panel is installed automatically
when you install the printer software. If you are a Linux OS user,
download Smart Panel from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/
printer) and install.
N
OTES
:
• To use this program, you need:
- Windows. Check for windows operating system(s) compatible with
your printer, refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s
Guide.
- Mac OS X 10.3 or higher
- Linux. To check for Linux systems that are compatible with your
printer, refer to Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.
- Internet Explorer version 5.0 or higher for flash animation in HTML
Help.
• If you need to know the exact name of your printer, you can check the
supplied CD-ROM.
Understanding Smart Panel
If an error occurs while printing, Smart Panel appears automatically,
showing the error.
You can also launch Smart Panel manually. Double-click the Smart
Panel icon on the Windows task bar (in Windows), or Notification Area
(in Linux). You can also click it on the status bar (in Mac OS X).
If you are a Windows user, from the
Start
menu, select
Programs
or
All
Programs
→
your printer driver name
→
Smart Panel
.
Double-click this icon in Windows.
Click this icon in Mac OS X.
Click this icon in Linux.
N
OTES
:
• If you have already installed more than one Samsung printer, first
select the printer model you want in order to use the corresponding
Smart Panel. Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X)
the Smart Panel icon and select
your printer name
.
• The Smart Panel window and its contents shown in this Software
User’s Guide may differ depending on the printer or Operating
System in use.
The Smart Panel program displays the current status of the printer, the
level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s) and various other
information. You can also change settings.
Toner Level
You can view the level of toner remaining in the toner cartridge(s).
The printer and the number of toner cartridge(s) shown in the above
window may differ depending on the printer in use. Any printers do
not have this feature.
Buy Now
You can order replacement toner cartridge(s) online.
Troubleshooting Guide
You can view Help to solve problems.
Driver Setting (Only for Windows)
You can use the printer properties window, which allows you to access
all of the printer options you need for using your printer.
For details,
See “Printer Settings” on page 14.
1
1
Using Smart Panel
32
Opening the Troubleshooting Guide
Using the troubleshooting guide, you can view solutions for error status
problems.
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel
icon and select
Troubleshooting Guide
.
Changing the Smart Panel Program
Settings
Right-click (in Windows or Linux) or click (in Mac OS X) the Smart Panel
icon and select
Options
. Select the settings you want from the
Options
window.
Using Your Printer in Linux
33
9Using Your Printer in Linux
You can use your machine in a Linux environment.
This chapter includes:
• Getting Started
• Installing the Unified Linux Driver
• Using the Unified Driver Configurator
• Configuring Printer Properties
• Printing a Document
• Scanning a Document
Getting Started
You need to download Linux software package from the Samsung
website (www.samsung.com/printer) to install the printer softwares.
Samsung’s Unified Linux Driver package contains printer and scanner
drivers, providing the ability to print documents and scan images. The
package also delivers powerful applications for configuring your machine
and further processing of the scanned documents.
After the driver is installed on your Linux system, the driver package
allows you to monitor a number of machine devices via fast ECP parallel
ports and USB simultaneously.
The acquired documents can then be edited, printed on the same local
or network machine devices, sent by e-mail, uploaded to an FTP site, or
transferred to an external OCR system.
The Unified Linux Driver package is supplied with a smart and flexible
installation program. You don't need to search for additional components
that might be necessary for the Unified Linux Driver software: all required
packages will be carried onto your system and installed automatically;
this is possible on a wide set of the most popular Linux clones.
Installing the Unified Linux Driver
Installing the Unified Linux Driver
1
Make sure that you connect your machine to your computer. Turn
both the computer and the machine on.
2
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in
root
in the
Login field and enter the system password.
N
OTE
: You must log in as a super user (root) to install the printer
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
3
From the Samsung website, download and unpack the Unified
Linux Driver package to your computer.
4
Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal
screen appears, type in:
[root@localhost root]#tar zxf [FilePath]/
UnifiedLinuxDriver.tar.gz[root@localhost root]#cd [FilePath]/cdroot/
Linux[root@localhost Linux]#./install.sh
N
OTE
: If you do not use the graphical interface and failed to install the
software, you have to use the driver in the text mode. Follow the steps 3
to 4, and then follow the instructions on the terminal screen.
5
When the welcome screen appears, click
Next
.
Using Your Printer in Linux
34
6
When the installation is complete, click
Finish
.
The installation program has added the Unified Driver Configurator
desktop icon and Samsung Unified Driver group to the system
menu for your convenience. If you have any difficulties, consult the
onscreen help that is available through your system menu or can
otherwise be called from the driver package windows applications,
such as
Unified Driver Configurator
or
Image Manager
.
N
OTE
: Installing the driver in the text mode:
• If you do not use the graphical interface or have failed the driver
installation, you have to use the driver in the text mode.
• Follow the step 1 to 3, then type [root@localhost Linux]# ./install.sh,
than follow the instruction on the terminal screen. Then the
installation completes.
• When you wan to uninstall the driver, follow the installation instruction
above, but type [root@localhost Linux]# ./uninstall.sh on the terminal
screen.
Uninstalling the Unified Linux Driver
1
When the Administrator Login window appears, type in
root
in the
Login field and enter the system password.
N
OTE
: You must log in as a super user (root) to uninstall the printer
software. If you are not a super user, ask your system administrator.
2
Click the icon at the bottom of the desktop. When the Terminal
screen appears, type in:
[root@localhost root]#cd /opt/Samsung/mfp/uninstall/
[root@localhost uninstall]#./uninstall.sh
3
Click
Uninstall
.
4
Click
Next
.
5
Click
Finish
.
Using Your Printer in Linux
35
Using the Unified Driver Configurator
Unified Linux Driver Configurator is a tool primarily intended for
configuring Printer or MFP devices. Since an MFP device combines the
printer and scanner, the Unified Linux Driver Configurator provides
options logically grouped for printer and scanner functions. There is also
a special MFP port option responsible for the regulation of access to an
MFP printer and scanner via a single I/O channel.
After installing the Unified Linux driver, the Unified Linux Driver
Configurator icon will automatically be created on your desktop.
Opening the Unified Driver Configurator
1
Double-click
Unified Driver Configurator
on the desktop.
You can also click the Startup Menu icon and select
Samsung
Unified Driver
and then
Unified Driver Configurator
.
2
Press each button on the Modules pane to switch to the
corresponding configuration window.
You can use the onscreen help by clicking
Help
.
3
After changing the configurations, click
Exit
to close the Unified
Driver Configurator.
Printers Configuration button
Scanners Configuration button
Ports Configuration button
Printers Configuration
Printers configuration has the two tabs:
Printers
and
Classes
.
Printers Tab
You can see the current system’s printer configuration by clicking on the
printer icon button on the left side of the Unified Driver Configurator
window.
You can use the following printer control buttons:
•
Refresh
: renews the available printers list.
•
Add Printer
: allows you to add a new printer.
•
Remove Printer
: removes the selected printer.
•
Set as Default
: sets the current printer as a default printer.
•
Stop
/
Start
: stops/starts the printer.
•
Test
: allows you to print a test page to check if the machine is
working properly.
•
Properties
: allows you to view and change the printer properties.
For details, see page 37.
Shows all of the
installed printer.
Switches to Printer
configuration.
Shows the status,
model name and URI of
your printer.
Using Your Printer in Linux
36
Classes Tab
The Classes tab shows a list of available printer classes.
•
Refresh
: Renews the classes list.
•
Add Class... :
Allows you to add a new printer class.
•
Remove Class :
Removes the selected printer class.
Scanners Configuration
In this window, you can monitor the activity of scanner devices, view a
list of installed Samsung MFP devices, change device properties, and
scan images.
•
Properties...
: Allows you to change the scan properties and scan
a document. See page 38.
•
Drivers... :
Allows you to monitor the activity of the scan drivers.
Shows the status of the class
and the number of printers in
the class.
Shows all of the
printer classes.
Switches to
Scanners
configuration. Shows all of the
installed scanners.
Shows the vendor, model
name and type of your
scanner.
Ports Configuration
In this window, you can view the list of available ports, check the status
of each port and release a port that is stalled in busy state when its owner
is terminated for any reason.
•
Refresh
: Renews the available ports list.
•
Release port :
Releases the selected port.
Sharing Ports Between Printers and Scanners
Your machine may be connected to a host computer via the parallel port
or USB port. Since the MFP device contains more than one device
(printer and scanner), it is necessary to organize proper access of
“consumer” applications to these devices via the single I/O port.
The Samsung Unified Linux Driver package provides an appropriate port
sharing mechanism that is used by Samsung printer and scanner
drivers. The drivers address their devices via so-called MFP ports. The
current status of any MFP port can be viewed via the Ports
Configuration. The port sharing prevents you from accessing one
functional block of the MFP device, while another block is in use.
When you install a new MFP device onto your system, it is strongly
recommended you do this with the assistance of an Unified Driver
Configurator. In this case you will be asked to choose I/O port for the new
device. This choice will provide the most suitable configuration for MFP’s
functionality. For MFP scanners I/O ports are being chosen by scanner
drivers automatically, so proper settings are applied by default.
Switches to
ports
configuration.
Shows the port type,
device connected to the
port and status
Shows all of the
available ports.
Using Your Printer in Linux
37
Configuring Printer Properties
Using the properties window provided by the Printers configuration, you
can change the various properties for your machine as a printer.
1
Open the Unified Driver Configurator.
If necessary, switch to Printers configuration.
2
Select your machine on the available printers list and click
Properties
.
3
The Printer Properties window opens.
The following five tabs display at the top of the window:
•
General
: allows you to change the printer location and name.
The name entered in this tab displays on the printer list in
Printers configuration.
•
Connection
: allows you to view or select another port. If you
change the printer port from USB to parallel or vice versa while in
use, you must re-configure the printer port in this tab.
•
Driver
: allows you to view or select another printer driver. By
clicking
Options
, you can set the default device options.
•
Jobs
: shows the list of print jobs. Click
Cancel job
to cancel the
selected job and select the
Show completed jobs
check box to
see previous jobs on the job list.
•
Classes
: shows the class that your printer is in. Click
Add to
Class
to add your printer to a specific class or click
Remove
from Class
to remove the printer from the selected class.
4
Click
OK
to apply the changes and close the Printer Properties
Window.
Printing a Document
Printing from Applications
There are a lot of Linux applications that you are allowed to print from
using Common UNIX Printing System (CUPS). You can print on your
machine from any such application.
1
From the application you are using, select
Print
from the
File
menu.
2
Select
Print
directly using
lpr
.
3
In the LPR GUI window, select the model name of your machine
from the Printer list and click
Properties
.
4
Change the printer and print job properties.
The following four tabs display at the top of the window.
•
General
- allows you to change the paper size, the paper type,
and the orientation of the documents, enables the duplex feature,
adds start and end banners, and changes the number of pages
per sheet.
Click.
Using Your Printer in Linux
38
•
Text
- allows you to specify the page margins and set the text
options, such as spacing or columns.
•
Graphics
- allows you to set image options that are used when
printing images/files, such as color options, image size, or image
position.
•
Device
: allows you to set the print resolution, paper source, and
destination.
5
Click
Apply
to apply the changes and close the Properties window.
6
Click
OK
in the LPR GUI window to start printing.
7
The Printing window appears, allowing you to monitor the status of
your print job.
To abort the current job, click
Cancel
.
Printing Files
You can print many different types of files on the Samsung machine
device using the standard CUPS way - directly from the command line
interface. The CUPS lpr utility allows you do that. But the drivers
package replaces the standard lpr tool by a much more user-friendly
LPR GUI program.
To print any document file:
1
Type
lpr <file_name>
from the Linux shell command line and
press
Enter
. The LPR GUI window appears.
When you type only
lpr
and press
Enter
, the Select file(s) to print
window appears first. Just select any files you want to print and
click
Open
.
2
In the LPR GUI window, select your printer from the list, and
change the printer and print job properties.
For details about the properties window, see page 37.
3
Click
OK
to start printing.
Scanning a Document
You can scan a document using the Unified Driver Configurator window.
1
Double-click the Unified Driver Configurator on your desktop.
2
Click the button to switch to Scanners Configuration.
3
Select the scanner on the list.
When you have only one MFP device and it is connected to the
computer and turned on, your scanner appears on the list and is
automatically selected.
If you have two or more scanners attached to your computer, you
can select any scanner to work at any time. For example, while
acquisition is in progress on the first scanner, you may select the
second scanner, set the device options and start the image
acquisition simultaneously.
4
Click
Properties
.
5
Load the document to be scanned
face up into the ADF (Automatic
Document Feeder) or face down on the document glass.
6
Click
Preview
in the Scanner Properties window.
Click your
scanner.
Using Your Printer in Linux
39
The document is scanned and the image preview appears in the
Preview Pane.
7
Change the scan options in the Image Quality and Scan Area
sections.
•
Image Quality
: allows you to select the color composition and
the scan resolution for the image.
•
Scan Area
: allows you to select the page size. The
Advanced
button enables you to set the page size manually.
If you want to use one of the preset scan option settings, select
from the Job Type drop-down list. For details about the preset Job
Type settings, see page 39.
You can restore the default setting for the scan options by clicking
Default
.
8
When you have finished, click
Scan
to start scanning.
The status bar appears on the bottom left of the window to show
you the progress of the scan. To cancel scanning, click
Cancel
.
9
The scanned image appears in the new Image Manager tab.
If you want to edit the scanned image, use the toolbar. For further
details about editing an image, see page 39.
10
When you are finished, click
Save
on the toolbar.
Drag the pointer to set
the image area to be
scanned.
11
Select the file directory where you want to save the image and
enter the file name.
12
Click
Save
.
Adding Job Type Settings
You can save your scan option settings to retrieve for a later scanning.
To save a new Job Type setting:
1
Change the options from the Scanner Properties window.
2
Click
Save As
.
3
Enter the name for your setting.
4
Click
OK
.
Your setting is added to the Saved Settings drop-down list.
To save a Job Type setting for the next scan job:
1
Select the setting you want to use from the Job Type drop-down
list.
2
The next time you open the Scanner Properties window, the saved
setting is automatically selected for the scan job.
To delete a Job Type setting:
1
Select the setting you want to delete from the Job Type drop-down
list.
2
Click
Delete
.
The setting is deleted from the list
Using the Image Manager
The Image Manager application provides you with menu commands and
tools to edit your scanned image.
You can use the following tools to edit the image:
Tools Function
Saves the image.
Use these tools to
edit the image.
Using Your Printer in Linux
40
For further details about the Image Manager application, refer to the
onscreen help.
Cancels your last action.
Restores the action you canceled.
Allows you to scroll through the image.
Crops the selected image area.
Zooms the image out.
Zooms the image in.
Allows you to scale the image size; you can enter
the size manually, or set the rate to scale
proportionally, vertically, or horizontally.
Allows you to rotate the image; you can select the
number of degrees from the drop-down list.
Allows you to flip the image vertically or
horizontally.
Allows you to adjust the brightness or contrast of
the image, or to invert the image.
Shows the properties of the image.
Tools Function
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
41
10
Using Your Printer with a
Macintosh
Your machine supports Macintosh systems with a built-in USB interface
or a 10/100 Base-TX network interface card. When you print a file from
a Macintosh computer, you can use the PostScript driver by installing the
PPD file.
N
OTE
:
Some printers do not support a network interface. Make
sure that your printer supports a network interface by referring to
Printer Specifications in your Printer User’s Guide.
This chapter includes:
• Installing Software
• Setting Up the Printer
•Printing
• Scanning
Installing Software
The PostScript driver CD-ROM that came with your machine provides
you with the PPD file to use the PS driver, Apple LaserWriter driver, for
printing on a Macintosh computer.
Also, it provides you with the Twain driver for scanning on a Macintosh
computer.
Installing the printer software
1
Connect your machine to the computer using the USB cable or the
Ethernet cable.
2
Turn on your computer and the machine.
3
Insert the supplied software CD-ROM which came with your
machine into the CD-ROM drive.
4
Double-click
CD-ROM icon
that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.
5
Double-click the
MAC_Installer
folder.
6
Double-click the
Installer OS X
icon.
7
Enter the password and click
OK
.
8
The Samsung Installer window opens. Click
Continue
.
9
Select
Easy Install
and click
Install
.
Easy Install
is recommended
for most users. All components necessary for machine operations
will be installed.
If you select
Custom Install
, you can choose individual
components to install.
10
When the message which warns that all applications will close on
your computer appears, click
Continue
.
11
After the installation is finished, click
Quit
.
N
OTE
: If you have installed scan driver, click
Restart
.
Uninstalling the printer software
1
Insert the CD-ROM which came with your printer into the CD-ROM
drive.
2
Double-click
CD-ROM icon
that appears on your Macintosh
desktop.
3
Double-click the
MAC_Installer
folder.
4
Double-click the
Installer OS X
icon.
5
Enter the password and click
OK
.
6
The Samsung Installer window opens. Click
Continue
.
7
Select
Uninstall
and click
Uninstall
.
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
42
8
When the message which warns that all applications will close on
your computer appears, click
Continue
.
9
When the uninstall is done, click
Quit
.
Setting Up the Printer
Set up for your printer will be different depending on which cable you use
to connect the printer to your computer—the network cable or the USB
cable.
For a Network-connected
N
OTE
:
Some printers do not support a network interface. Before
connecting your printer, make sure that your printer supports a
network interface by referring to Printer Specifications in your
Printer User’s Guide.
1
Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 41 to install
the PPD file on your computer.
2
Open the
Applications
folder
→
Utilities
, and
Print Setup Utility
.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, open
System Preferences
from the
Applications
folder, and click
Printer & Fax
.
3
Click
Add
on the
Printer List
.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, press the “
+
” icon then a display window
will pop up.
4
For Mac OS X 10.3, select the
IP Printing
tab.
• For Mac OS X 10.4, click
IP Printer
.
• For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6, click
IP
.
5
Select
Socket/HP Jet Direct
in
Printer Type
.
When printing a document containing many pages, printing
performance may be enhanced by choosing Socket for
Printer
Type
option.
6
Enter the machine’s IP address in the
Printer Address
field.
7
Enter the queue name in the
Queue Name
field. If you cannot
determine the queue name for your machine server, try using the
default queue first.
8
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung
in
Printer Model
and
your printer name
in
Model
Name
.
• For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung
in
Print Using
and
your printer name
in
Model
.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly,
select
Select a driver to use...
and
your printer name
in
Print
Using
.
Your machine appears on the
Printer List
and is set as the default
printer.
9
Click
Add
.
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
43
For a USB-connected
1
Follow the instructions on “Installing Software” on page 41 to install
the PPD file on your computer.
2
Open the
Applications
folder
→
Utilities
, and
Print Setup Utility
.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, open
System Preferences
from the
Applications
folder, and click
Printer & Fax
.
3
Click
Add
on the
Printer List
.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, press the “
+
” icon then a display window
will pop up.
4
For MAC OS 10.3, select the
USB
tab.
• For MAC OS 10.4, click
Default Browser
and find the USB
connection.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, click
Default
and find the USB
connection.
5
Select
your printer name
.
6
For MAC OS 10.3, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung
in
Printer Model
and
your printer name
in
Model
Name
.
• For MAC OS 10.4, if Auto Select does not work properly, select
Samsung
in
Print Using
and
your printer name
in
Model
.
• For MAC OS 10.5~10.6, if Auto Select does not work properly,
select
Select a driver to use...
and
your printer name
in
Print
Using
.
Your machine appears on the
Printer List
and is set as the default
printer.
7
Click
Add
.
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
44
Printing
N
OTES
:
• The Macintosh printer’s properties window that appears in this User’s
Guide may differ depending on the printer in use. However the
composition of the printer properties window is similar.
•
You can check your printer name in the supplied CD-ROM.
Printing a Document
When you print with a Macintosh, you need to check the printer software
setting in each application you use. Follow these steps to print from a
Macintosh.
1
Open a Macintosh application and select the file you want to print.
2
Open the
File
menu and click
Page Setup
(
Document Setup
in
some applications).
3
Choose your paper size, orientation, scaling, and other options and
click
OK
.
4
Open the
File
menu and click
Print
.
5
Choose the number of copies you want and indicate which pages
you want to print.
6
Click
Print
when you finish setting the options.
▲ Mac OS 10.5
Make sure that your
printer is selected.
Changing Printer Settings
You can use advanced printing features when using your printer.
From your Macintosh application, select
Print
from the
File
menu. The
printer name which appears in the printer properties window may differ
depending on the printer in use. Except for the name, the composition of
the printer properties window is similar.
N
OTES
: The setting options may differ depending on printers and
Macintosh OS version.
Layout
The
Layout
tab provides options to adjust how the document appears
on the printed page. You can print multiple pages on one sheet of paper.
Select
Layout
from the drop-down list under
Orientation
to access the
following features.
•Pages per Sheet: This feature determines how many pages
printed on one page. For details, see “Printing Multiple Pages on
One Sheet of Paper” on page 47.
•Layout Direction: You can select the printing direction on a page
as like the examples on UI.
•Border: This option allows you to print a border around each
page on the sheet.
•Two-Sided: This option allows you to print on both sides of a
paper. (See “Printing on both sides of paper” on page 47.)
•Reverse Page Orientation: This option allows you to rotate
paper 180 degrees.
▲ Mac OS 10.5
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
45
Graphics
The
Graphics
tab provides options for selecting
Resolution
. Select
Graphics
from the drop-down list under
Orientation
to access the
graphic features.
•Resolution: You can select the printing resolution. The higher the
setting, the sharper the clarity of printed characters and graphics.
The higher setting also may increase the time it takes to print a
document.
Paper
Set
Paper Type
to correspond to the paper loaded in the tray from which
you want to print. This will let you get the best quality printout. If you load
a different type of print material, select the corresponding paper type.
▲ Mac OS 10.5
▲ Mac OS 10.5
Job Accounting
This feature lets you control and lock all outgoing data, or change the
password.
Job Setting
This option allows you to choose how to print or save the printing file
by using the HDD.
•Print Mode: The default Print Mode is Normal which is for
printing without saving the printing file in the optional HDD.
•User ID: This option is used when you need to find a saved file
using the control panel.
•Job Name: This option is used when you need to find a saved file
using the control panel.
▲ Mac OS 10.5
▲ Mac OS 10.5
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
46
Printer Settings
This option allows you to extend the life of your toner cartridge and
reduces the cost per page without a significant reduction in print
quality.
Printer Features
Printer Features
tab provides
Reverse Duplex Printing
and
Fit to
Page
options. Select
Printer Features
from the drop-down list under
Orientation
to access the following features.
Advanced Options
•Reverse Duplex Printing: This option allows you to select
general print order compared to duplex print order. If this option
does not appear, your machine does not have this feature.
•Fit to Page: This setting allows you to scale your print job to any
selected paper size regardless of the digital document size. This
can be useful when you want to check fine details on a small
document.
▲ Mac OS 10.5
▲ Mac OS 10.5
Optional Finisher
•Staple: Do the stapling on the printouts.
•Request Offset: If you want the printouts to be sorted the same
way as the original, the machine places printout sets slightly offset
from one another.
▲ Mac OS 10.5
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
47
Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet of
Paper
You can print more than one page on a single sheet of paper. This
feature provides a cost-effective way to print draft pages.
1
From your Macintosh application, select
Print
from the
File
menu.
2
Select
Layout
from the drop-down list under
Orientation
. In the
Pages per Sheet
drop-down list, select the number of pages you
want to print on one sheet of paper.
3
Select the other options you want to use.
4
Click
Print
, then machine prints the selected number of pages you
want to print on one sheet of paper.
▲ Mac OS 10.5
Printing on both sides of paper
You can print on both sides of the paper. Before printing in the duplex
mode, decide on which edge you will be binding your finished document.
The binding options are, as follows:
•Long-edge binding: This option is the conventional layout used
in book binding.
•Short-edge binding: This option is the type often used with
calendars.
1
From your Macintosh application, select
Print
from the
File
menu.
2
Select
Layout
from the drop-down list under
Orientation
.
3
Select a binding orientation from
Two-Sided
option.
4
Select the other options you want to use.
5
Click
Print
, and the machine prints on both sides of the paper.
C
AUTION
: If you print more than 2 copies, the first copy and the
second copy might print on same sheet of paper. Avoid printing on both
sides of paper when you are printing more than 1 copy.
▲ Mac OS 10.5
Using Your Printer with a Macintosh
48
Scanning
You can scan documents using
Image Capture
program. Macintosh OS
offers
Image Capture
program.
Scanning with USB
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
3
Start
Applications
and click
Image Capture
.
N
OTE
: If
No Image Capture device connected
message appears,
disconnect the USB cable and reconnect it. If the problem persists,
please refer to the
Image Capture
’s help.
4
Set the scan options on this program.
5
Scan and save your scanned image.
N
OTES
:
• For more information about using
Image Capture
, refer to the
Image
Capture
’s help.
• Use TWAIN-compliant softwares to apply more scan options.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe
Photoshop.
• If scanning does not operate in
Image Capture
, update Mac OS to
the latest version.
Image Capture
operates properly in Mac OS X
10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.
Scanning with network
1
Make sure that the machine is connected to your computer and
powered on.
2
Load originals face up into the document feeder, or place a single
original face down on the scanner glass.
3
Start
Applications
and click
Image Capture
.
4
Click
Devices
and click
Browse Devices
.
5
For Mac OS X 10.4:
Select your machine in Twain devices option. Make sure that
Use
TWAIN software
checkbox is checked, and click
Connect
.
• If a warning message appears, click
Change Port..
to select
port.
• If TWAIN UI appears, from the
Preference
tab, click
Change
Port..
to select port.
N
OTE
: Refer to
Scan Manager
for
Change Port..
use. (See "Setting
scan information in Scan Manager" on page 48.)
For Mac OS X 10.5~10.6:
Make sure that
Connected
checkbox is checked beside your
machine in
Bonjour Devices
.
If you want to scan using TWAIN, refer to the Mac OS X10.4 steps
above.
6
Set the scan options on this program.
7
Scan and save your scanned image.
N
OTES
:
• For more information about using
Image Capture
, refer to the
Image
Capture
’s help.
• Use TWAIN-compliant softwares to apply more scan options.
• You can also scan using TWAIN-compliant software, such as Adobe
Photoshop.
• If scanning does not operate in
Image Capture
, update Mac OS to
the latest version.
Image Capture
operates properly in Mac OS X
10.3.9 or higher and Mac OS X 10.4.7 or higher.
Setting scan information in Scan Manager
To find out about
Scan Manager
program information, to check the
installed scan driver's condition, to change scan settings. and to add or
delete the folders where scanned documents to computer are saved in
Scan Manager
program, follow these instructions:
1
From the
Smart Panel
menu on Status bar, click
Scan Manager
.
2
Select the appropriate machine from the
Scan Manager
.
3
Press
Properties
.
4
Use
Set Scan Button
to change the file destination or scan
settings, to add or delete application programs, and to format files.
You can change the scanning machine by using
Change port
.
(Local or Network)
5
When done, press
OK
.
49
Software section
Index
A
advanced printing, use
19
Advanced properties, set
17
B
Basic properties, set
Windows
15
booklet printing
20
C
canceling
scan
30
D
document, print
Macintosh
44
Windows
13
double-sided printing
21
duplex printing
print
24
F
favorites settings, for printing
17
favorites settings, use
17
G
Graphics properties, set
16
H
help, use
18
,
25
I
install
printer driver
Macintosh
41
Windows
5
installing
Linux software
33
L
Linux
driver, install
33
printer properties
37
printing
37
scanning
38
M
Macintosh
driver
install
41
printing
44
scanning
48
setting up the printer
42
MFP driver, install
Linux
33
N
n-up printing
Macintosh
47
Windows
19
O
orientation, print
37
Windows
15
overlay
create
23
delete
23
print
23
P
Paper properties, set
15
paper size, set
print
37
paper source, set
38
paper tray, set
copy
26
paper type, set
print
37
poster, print
20
PostScript driver
installing
24
printdocument
13
fit to page
21
from Macintosh
44
from Windows
13
N-up
Macintosh
47
Windows
19
overlay
23
poster
22
PRN
14
scaling
21
watermark
22
print resolution
38
printer driver, install
Linux
33
printer preferences
using help
17
printer properties
Linux
37
printer properties, set
Macintosh
44
Windows
14
,
24
printer software
install
Macintosh
41
Windows
5
uninstall
Windows
12
printing
booklets
20
double-sided
21
from Linux
37
printing on both sides of paper
Windows
24
R
resolution
50
printing
38
S
scanning
Linux
38
SmarThru
28
TWAIN
30
WIA driver
30
scanning from Macintosh
48
setting
favorites
17
toner save
17
true-type option
16
Smart Panel, use
31
software
install
Macintosh
41
Windows
5
reinstall
Windows
11
system requirements
Macintosh
41
uninstall
Windows
12
T
toner save, set
17
TWAIN, scan
30
U
uninstall, software
Windows
12
uninstalling
MFP driver
Linux
34
W
watermark
create
22
delete
22
edit
22
print
22
WIA, scan
30

Navigation menu